Broadgate Bg-30 Iomm A05 v14 en

BroadGate BG-30
Version 14
Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance Manual
426006-2333-013-A05
BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual

V14
Catalog No: X39459
June 2012
6th Edition
Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2002-2012. All rights reserved worldwide.

This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Telecom Ltd. (ECI Telecom). BY OPENING THE
DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE
UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING
WRITTEN MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU
OBTAINED THEM.
The information contained in the documentation and/or disk is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright,
patent, and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting ECI Telecom's
rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained in the documentation and/or
disk may be published, reproduced, or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express prior
written permission of ECI Telecom. In addition, any use of this document, the documentation and/or the disk, or the
information contained therein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed, is strictly forbidden.
ECI Telecom reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or
specifications. Information supplied by ECI Telecom is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility whatsoever is assumed by ECI Telecom for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, which
may be affected in any way by the use and/or dissemination thereof.
Any representation(s) in the documentation and/or disk concerning performance of ECI Telecom product(s) are for
informational purposes only and are not warranties of product performance or otherwise, either express or implied.
ECI Telecom's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty
offered by ECI Telecom.
The documentation and/or disk is provided AS IS and may contain flaws, omissions, or typesetting errors. No
warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto, unless specifically undertaken in ECI Telecom's sales
contract or order confirmation. Information contained in the documentation and in the disk is periodically updated,
and changes will be incorporated in subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please notify ECI
Telecom. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI Telecom and is protected by
all relevant copyright, patent, and other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must
treat the information contained in the documentation and disk as any other copyrighted material (for example, a
book or musical recording).
Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell, or otherwise dispose of the documentation and disk, as
applicable. YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR
ANY COPY IN WHOLE OR PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT
EXPRESSLY GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI Telecom.
All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders.
ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever
caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with this documentation and/or disk, the information contained
therein, its use, or otherwise. Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim
and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special, incidental, or consequential loss or damage which may arise
in respect of the documentation and/or disk and/or the information contained therein, howsoever caused, even if
advised of the possibility of such damages.
The end user hereby undertakes and acknowledges that they read the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines"
instructions and that such instructions were understood by them.
It is hereby clarified that ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage
whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with you fulfilling and/or failed to fulfill
in whole or in part the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions.
Contents
About This Manual .................................................................. xiii
Overview ........................................................................................................... xiii
Intended Audience ............................................................................................ xiii
Document Organization ..................................................................................... xiii
Document Conventions ..................................................................................... xiv
Related Documentation ...................................................................................... xv
Obtaining Technical Documentation .................................................................. xv
Technical Assistance......................................................................................... xvi
Introduction.............................................................................. 1-1
BG-30 Platform Overview ................................................................................. 1-1
Before You Start ...................................................................... 2-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 2-1
Site Preparation................................................................................................ 2-4
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 2-6
Installing BG-30 in Racks ................................................................................. 2-6
Preparing Cables and Fibers ............................................................................ 2-9
Work and Equipment Safety ........................................................................... 2-16
Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge .................................................... 2-22
Installing Equipment ............................................................... 3-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
Preliminary Preparations .................................................................................. 3-2
Installation Sequence ....................................................................................... 3-2
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................... 3-5
Installation Options ........................................................................................... 3-6
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ..................................................................... 3-8
Installing the BG-30B Platform in the Rack .................................................... 3-31
Installing the BG-30E Platform in the Rack .................................................... 3-47
Installing the EXT-2U Platform in the Rack .................................................... 3-61
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the BG-30 Shelf ........................................ 3-73
BG-30B Wall-Mounted Installations ....................................... 4-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1
Wall-Mounted Cabinet ...................................................................................... 4-2
DDF 21 E1s Unit ............................................................................................ 4-13
Wall-Mounted Frame ...................................................................................... 4-34
426006-2333-013-A05
ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary
Contents
BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 5-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 5-1
Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 5-1
Site Commissioning Tests ................................................................................ 5-2
SDH Commissioning Tests .............................................................................. 5-5
Data Network Commissioning Tests .............................................................. 5-11
Maintenance ............................................................................. 6-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 6-1
Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials .............................................................. 6-1
Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................... 6-2
Onsite Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 6-3
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 6-24
Connection Data ..................................................................... A-1
Overview .......................................................................................................... A-2

INF_30B/INF_30BH/INF_30E DC Input Power Connectors ............................ A-2
AC_CONV_30B/AC_CONV_30E AC Input Power Connectors ....................... A-2
MNG Ethernet Connector ................................................................................. A-3
T3/T4 Timing Connector................................................................................... A-4
Auxiliary Connector on the MCP30 .................................................................. A-5
RS-232 Connector............................................................................................ A-7
Orderwire Connector ........................................................................................ A-8
V.11 Overhead Connector ................................................................................ A-9
Alarms Connector........................................................................................... A-10
E1 Connectors on the PME1_21 .................................................................... A-11
PME1_63 Connection Data ............................................................................ A-15
Ethernet Interface Connectors ....................................................................... A-23
PM345_3 Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-23
P345_3E Card Connection Data .................................................................... A-23
PE1_63 Card Connection Data ...................................................................... A-23
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data ......................................................... A-24
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection Data .............................................................. A-24
DMGE_1_L1 Connection Data ....................................................................... A-25
TP21_2 Connection Data ............................................................................... A-25
TP63_1 Connection Data ............................................................................... A-30
TPS1_1 Connection Data ............................................................................... A-31
SM_10E Card Connection Data ..................................................................... A-31
ICP_VF Connection Data ............................................................................... A-44
ICP_V24 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-45
ICP_V35 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-48
ICP_V11_V24 Connection Data ..................................................................... A-49
ICP_DB37D Connection Data ........................................................................ A-51
RAP-4B Connectors ....................................................................................... A-55
ii
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Contents
Rack Installation ..................................................................... B-1
Installing Equipment Racks .............................................................................. B-1

Installing 19" Racks .......................................................................................... B-6
Index .......................................................................................... I-1
426006-2333-013-A05
iii
Contents
iv

Maintenance Manual
426006-2333-013-A05
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Typical BG-30 platform ................................................................................ 1-2
Figure 2-1: Typical installation of four BG-30 platforms in an ETSI 2200 rack .............. 2-8
Figure 2-2: Laser warning label.................................................................................... 2-19
Figure 2-3: Basic ESD warning symbol ....................................................................... 2-22
Figure 3-1: Typical installation of a single BG-30 platform in a 2200 ETSI rack ........... 3-3
Figure 3-2: Typical installation of four BG-30B platforms .............................................. 3-7
Figure 3-3: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud ......................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-4: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes ....................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-5: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG ........................................... 3-11
Figure 3-6: RAP-BG platform power cable grounding screws ..................................... 3-13
Figure 3-7: RAP-BG front cover removal ..................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-8: RAP-BG circuit breaker installation ........................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-9: Platform DC input power connector pin functions ..................................... 3-15
Figure 3-10: Locating RAP-4B grounding stud ............................................................ 3-17
Figure 3-11: RAP-4B with grounding cable.................................................................. 3-18
Figure 3-12: Identifying RAP-4B cable routes.............................................................. 3-18
Figure 3-13: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B .......................................... 3-19
Figure 3-14: RAP-4B platform power cable grounding screws .................................... 3-20
Figure 3-15: RAP-4B front cover removal .................................................................... 3-21
Figure 3-16: RAP-4B circuit breaker installation .......................................................... 3-21
Figure 3-17: Platform DC input power connector pin functions ................................... 3-22
Figure 3-18: Threading optical fibers in the FST.......................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-19: Attaching rack mounting brackets to the ODF......................................... 3-24
Figure 3-20: ODF front panel ....................................................................................... 3-25
Figure 3-21: ODF open view ........................................................................................ 3-25
Figure 3-22: ODF fiber routes ...................................................................................... 3-26
Figure 3-23: Installing ICP_MCP30 in the rack ............................................................ 3-28
Figure 3-24: Installing SM_10E ICPs in the rack ......................................................... 3-29
Figure 3-25: Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack .............................................. 3-30
Figure 3-26: Installing rail stiffeners in the rack ........................................................... 3-32
Figure 3-27: BG-30B slots............................................................................................ 3-33
Figure 3-28: Installing a power module in the BG-30B ................................................ 3-35
Figure 3-29: Installing an FCU_30B/ FCU_30BH module in the BG-30B ................... 3-36
Figure 3-30: Location of the CF card inside the MCP30B/D........................................ 3-37
Figure 3-31: Installing a CF card into the MCP30B/D .................................................. 3-38
Figure 3-32: Installing an MCP30B module in the BG-30B ......................................... 3-39
426006-2333-013-A05
List of Figures

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-33: Location of the SD card inside the MCP30 ............................................. 3-40
Figure 3-34: Installing the SD card into the MCP30 .................................................... 3-41
Figure 3-35: Installing an MCP30 module in the BG-30B ............................................ 3-42
Figure 3-36: Installing an XIO30 module in the BG-30B.............................................. 3-43
Figure 3-37: Installing a Tslot module in the BG-30B .................................................. 3-44
Figure 3-38: Installing an AC_CONV_MODULE in the AC_CONV_UNIT ................... 3-45
Figure 3-39: Installing an SFP/XFP module in the BG ................................................ 3-46
Figure 3-40: Installing the H connector ........................................................................ 3-48
Figure 3-41: Installing the BG-30E ............................................................................... 3-49
Figure 3-42: Removing the BG-30E from the BG-30B ................................................ 3-50
Figure 3-43: Inserting the thin flat-head tool ................................................................ 3-51
Figure 3-44: Raising the rivet cap ................................................................................ 3-51
Figure 3-45: Removing the rivet ................................................................................... 3-51
Figure 3-46: BG-30E regular slots layout..................................................................... 3-52
Figure 3-47: BG-30E slots layout with ES 3# extended ............................................... 3-52
Figure 3-48: Installing a power module in the BG-30E ................................................ 3-54
Figure 3-49: Installing an FCU_30E in the BG-30E ..................................................... 3-55
Figure 3-50: Installing an extension card in the BG-30E ............................................. 3-56
Figure 3-51: Removing the blank panel ....................................................................... 3-57
Figure 3-52: Removing the card guide......................................................................... 3-58
Figure 3-53: Installing a long card in the BG-30E ........................................................ 3-59
Figure 3-54: Installing a traffic module on the SM_10E ............................................... 3-60
Figure 3-55: Installing the H connector in the BG-30 ................................................... 3-62
Figure 3-56: Removing the BG-30E from the BG-30B ................................................ 3-63
Figure 3-57: Inserting the thin flat-head tool ................................................................ 3-64
Figure 3-58: Raising the rivet cap ................................................................................ 3-64
Figure 3-59: Removing the rivet ................................................................................... 3-64
Figure 3-60: EXT-2U regular slots layout..................................................................... 3-65
Figure 3-61: Installing a power module in the EXT-2U ................................................ 3-67
Figure 3-62: Installing an FCU_E2U in the EXT-2U .................................................... 3-68
Figure 3-63: Installing an extension card in the EXT-2U ............................................. 3-69
Figure 3-64: Removing the blank panel ....................................................................... 3-70
Figure 3-65: Removing the card guide......................................................................... 3-71
Figure 3-66: Installing a long card in the BG-30E ........................................................ 3-72
Figure 3-67: PME1_63 traffic cable ............................................................................. 3-78
Figure 3-68: PME1_63 traffic cable installation ........................................................... 3-79
Figure 3-69: L114 protection jumper cable schematic diagram ................................... 3-82
vi
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
Figure 3-73: TP21_2 1:2 protection scheme example ................................................. 3-87
Figure 3-74: TP21_2 1:1 protection scheme example ................................................. 3-87
Figure 3-75: TP63_1_1 (two PE1_63 cards) 1:1 protection scheme example ............ 3-88
Figure 3-76: TP63_1_1 (three PME1_21 modules and one PE1_63 card)
1:1 protection scheme example ................................................................................... 3-88
Figure 3-77: TPS1_1 (two SMQ1&4 modules) 1:1 protection scheme example ......... 3-89
Figure 4-1: Wall-mounted cabinet general view............................................................. 4-2
Figure 4-2: Tools required for cabinet installation .......................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-3: Wall-mounted cabinet interior components ................................................. 4-4
Figure 4-4: Preparing the rear panel holes .................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4-5: Installing the rear panel ............................................................................... 4-6
Figure 4-6: Installing the support rails ............................................................................ 4-7
Figure 4-7: Installing the 19" vertical extrusions ............................................................ 4-7
Figure 4-8: Installing the C-rail ....................................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-9: Cabling accessories installed in the cabinet ................................................ 4-9
Figure 4-10: Cabling accessories ................................................................................ 4-10
Figure 4-11: DDF general view .................................................................................... 4-13
Figure 4-12: Installing the brackets for ETSI installation ............................................. 4-14
Figure 4-13: Attaching the connection blocks .............................................................. 4-15
Figure 4-14: Installing a BG platform and three DDFs ................................................. 4-17
Figure 4-15: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG and three DDFs) ...................................... 4-18
Figure 4-16: Installing a BG platform, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit .................... 4-20
Figure 4-17: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG, two DDFs, AC CONV unit) ..................... 4-21
Figure 4-18: Wall-mounted cabinet cabling ................................................................. 4-24
Figure 4-19: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing front view ...................................... 4-25
Figure 4-20: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing left side view................................. 4-26
Figure 4-21: Installing top and bottom covers .............................................................. 4-31
Figure 4-22: Connecting grounding cables .................................................................. 4-31
Figure 4-23: Installing side covers ............................................................................... 4-32
Figure 4-24: Connecting grounding cables .................................................................. 4-33
Figure 4-25: Installing the front door ............................................................................ 4-33
Figure 4-26: Connecting the door grounding cable ..................................................... 4-34
Figure 4-27: Wall-mounted frame installation .............................................................. 4-35
Figure 4-28: Attaching the fiber guide tube .................................................................. 4-36
Figure 4-29: Holes location for wall-mounted frame .................................................... 4-37
Figure 4-30: Installing a BG and three DDFs ............................................................... 4-39
Figure 4-31: Installing a BG, a DDF, and a RAP-BG ................................................... 4-40
Figure 4-32: Installing a BG, an ICP_MCP30, and a DDF........................................... 4-41
426006-2333-013-A05
vii
List of Figures

Maintenance Manual
Figure 4-33: Installing a BG, a DDF, and an AC/DC CONV ........................................ 4-42
Figure 4-34: Installing a BG and a DDF ....................................................................... 4-44
Figure 4-35: Installing the front cover .......................................................................... 4-46
Figure 4-36: Routing and connecting cables and fibers in the wall-mounted
frame ............................................................................................................................ 4-48
Figure 4-37: Wall-mounted frame cable routing - left side view................................... 4-49
Figure 6-1: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an XIO module ............................. 6-31
Figure A-1: POWER IN input power connector, pin functions ....................................... A-2
Figure A-2: AC input power connector ........................................................................... A-2
Figure A-3: Ethernet connector, PIN identification ......................................................... A-3
Figure A-4: T3/T4 connector, pin identification .............................................................. A-4
Figure A-5: Auxiliary connector for MCP30/MCP64, pin identification .......................... A-5
Figure A-6: RS-232 overhead connectors, pin identification ......................................... A-7
Figure A-7: RS-232 overhead cable .............................................................................. A-7
Figure A-8: RS-232 overhead cable label ...................................................................... A-7
Figure A-9: OW connector, pin identification ................................................................. A-8
Figure A-10: V.11 connector, pin identification .............................................................. A-9
Figure A-11: Alarms connector, pin identification ........................................................ A-10
Figure A-12: E1 connectors for PME1_21, pin identification ....................................... A-11
Figure A-13: PME1_63 connector pin identification ..................................................... A-15
Figure A-14: E1 connectors for TP21_2, pin identification .......................................... A-25
Figure A-15: SM_10E traffic module connector, pin identification ............................... A-31
Figure A-16: 25-pin D-type male connector, pin identification ..................................... A-45
Figure A-17: 9-pin D-type male connector, pin identification ....................................... A-46
Figure A-18: M34 female connector, pin identification ................................................. A-48
Figure A-19: 15-pin D-type female connector, pin identification .................................. A-49
Figure A-20: 25-pin D-type male connector, pin identification ..................................... A-49
Figure A-21: 37-pin D-type female connector, pin identification .................................. A-51
Figure A-22: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector, pin identification ............................ A-55
Figure A-23: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin identification ............................ A-57
Figure B-1: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks .............................................................. B-3
Figure B-2: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks ................................................... B-4
Figure B-3: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead
tray (2200 mm rack) ....................................................................................................... B-5
Figure B-4: Example of an approved European 19 rack .............................................. B-6
viii
426006-2333-013-A05
List of Tables
Table 2-1: Typical BG-30 equipment installation sequence .......................................... 2-1
Table 2-2: Environmental requirements ......................................................................... 2-4
Table 2-3: Equipment dimensions ................................................................................. 2-5
Table 2-4: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools ............................................... 2-6
Table 2-5: Traffic cables mating connector data for BG-30B....................................... 2-12
Table 2-6: Traffic cables mating connector data for BG-30E....................................... 2-13
Table 2-7: Optical fibers and mating connector data for BG-30B ................................ 2-14
Table 2-8: Optical fibers and mating connector data for BG-30E ................................ 2-15
Table 2-9: BG-30B/E and EXT-2U circuit breaker data ............................................... 2-18
Table 2-10: LC transceivers laser information STM-4 SFP ......................................... 2-20
Table 2-11: LC transceivers laser information STM-1/100BaseFX SFP ..................... 2-21
Table 2-12: LC transceivers laser information GbE SFP (OTGBE) ............................. 2-21
Table 3-1: Outline of typical BG-30B equipment installation sequence ......................... 3-4
Table 3-2: BG-30B modules......................................................................................... 3-34
Table 3-3: BG-30E modules......................................................................................... 3-53
Table 3-4: EXT-2U modules......................................................................................... 3-66
Table 3-5: Protection and protected cards summary ................................................... 3-81
Table 3-6: Protection jumper cables usage ................................................................. 3-86
Table 3-7: TPS1_1 1:1 I/O protection slot allocation ................................................... 3-89
Table 5-1: Card and module inventory BG-30 platform ................................................. 5-2
Table 5-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks .................................................... 5-3
Table 5-3: Measured optical levels ................................................................................ 5-4
Table 5-4: 2 Mbps tests.................................................................................................. 5-5
Table 5-5: 34 Mbps tests................................................................................................ 5-6
Table 5-6: 45 Mbps tests................................................................................................ 5-6
Table 5-7: SDH tests ...................................................................................................... 5-6
Table 5-8: Traffic stability test time intervals .................................................................. 5-8
Table 5-9: Throughput and latency test results............................................................ 5-11
Table 5-10: Frame loss rate test results ...................................................................... 5-12
Table 6-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks........................................... 6-2
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting power problems ................................................................. 6-4
Table 6-3: General troubleshooting procedures for BG-30B power-on based
on MCP30 panel LEDs................................................................................................... 6-6
Table 6-4: General troubleshooting procedures for Tslot or XIO panels ....................... 6-9
Table 6-5: General troubleshooting procedures for the MCP30 .................................. 6-10
Table 6-6: General troubleshooting procedures on Tslot and XIO module panels...... 6-11
426006-2333-013-A05
ix
List of Tables

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-7: General troubleshooting procedures for the INF_30B/INF_30BH

and INF_30BH ............................................................................................................. 6-12
Table 6-8: General troubleshooting procedures for the FCU_30B/FCU_30BH........... 6-12
Table 6-9: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins ......... 6-13
Table 6-10: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMFE_4_L1, DMFE_4_L2,
and DMEOP_4 ............................................................................................................. 6-15
Table 6-11: General troubleshooting procedures for extended cards
(PE1_63, P345_3, SM_10E, ESW_2G_8F_E, S1_4, and S4_1) ................................ 6-16
Table 6-12: Special troubleshooting procedures for P345_3 card............................... 6-18
Table 6-13: Special troubleshooting procedures for ESW_2G_8F_E cards ............... 6-18
Table 6-14: General troubleshooting procedures for daughterboards on
SM_10E cards ............................................................................................................. 6-19
Table 6-15: Special troubleshooting procedures for SM_EOP daughter boards......... 6-20
Table 6-16: Special troubleshooting procedures for OW box ...................................... 6-20
Table 6-17: Special troubleshooting procedures for
TP21_2/TP63_1/TPS1_1 cards ................................................................................... 6-22
Table 6-18: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMFX_4_L1
and DMFX_4_L2 .......................................................................................................... 6-22
Table 6-19: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMGE_1_L1 .............................. 6-23
Table 6-20: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMGE_4_L1
and DMGE_2_L2 ......................................................................................................... 6-24
Table A-1: Ethernet connector, pin assignment ............................................................. A-3
Table A-2: T3/T4 connector, PIN identification .............................................................. A-4
Table A-3: 1-11 Auxiliary connector, pin assignment .................................................... A-5
Table A-4: RS-232 connectors, pin assignment ............................................................ A-8
Table A-5: OW connector, pin assignment .................................................................... A-8
Table A-6: V.11 overhead connector, pin assignment ................................................... A-9
Table A-7: Alarms connector, pin assignment ............................................................. A-10
Table A-8: PME1_21 connector, pin assignment......................................................... A-11
Table A-9: Connector P1 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines ..................................................... A-15
Table A-10: Connector P3 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines ................................................... A-17
Table A-11: Connector P1 E1 #22 to E1 #42 Tx lines ................................................. A-18
Table A-12: Connector P3 E1 #22 to E1 #42 Rx lines ................................................. A-19
Table A-13: Connector P1 E1 #43 to E1 #63 Tx lines ................................................. A-20
Table A-14: Connector P3 E1 #43 to E1 #63 Rx lines ................................................. A-21
Table A-15: Gigabit Ethernet connector, pin assignment ............................................ A-25
Table A-16: Twin 68-pin VHDCI connector (P2), pin assignment................................ A-26
Table A-17: Twin 68-pin VHDCI connector (P1), pin assignment................................ A-28
Table A-18: SM_10E SM_FXO_8 and SM_FXS_8 connector, pin assignment .......... A-32
Table A-19: SM_10E SM_EM_24W6E connector, pin assignment ............................. A-33
Table A-20: SM_10E SM_V35E connector, pin assignment ....................................... A-35
x
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
List of Tables
Table A-21: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 8 x V.24 transparent
without controls mode .................................................................................................. A-36
Table A-22: SM_V24E connector, pin assignment ...................................................... A-37
Table A-23: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 2 x V.24
synchronous with controls mode .................................................................................. A-39
Table A-24: SM_10E SM_V35_V11 connector, pin assignment ................................. A-40
Table A-25: SM_10E SM_CODIR_4E connector, pin assignment .............................. A-41
Table A-26: SM_10E SM_OMNI_E connector, pin assignment .................................. A-42
Table A-27: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_FXS_8E
or SM_FXO_8E ............................................................................................................ A-44
Table A-28: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving
SM_EM_24W6E ........................................................................................................... A-44
Table A-29: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving
SM_CODIR_4E ............................................................................................................ A-45
Table A-30: ICP_V24 synchronous V.24 25-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-46
Table A-31: ICP_V24 asynchronous V.24 9-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-47
Table A-32: ICP_V24 transparent V.24 9-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-47
Table A-33: ICP_V35 M34 female connector, pin assignment .................................... A-48
Table A-34: ICP_V11_V24 15-pin D-type connector, pin assignment ......................... A-49
Table A-35: ICP_V11_V24 V.24 25-pin D-type connector, pin assignment ................ A-50
Table A-36: ICP_DB37D 37 pin D-type connector, pin assignment ............................ A-51
Table A-37: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, RS-449 pin assignment............... A-52
Table A-38: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, RS-422 pin assignment............... A-53
Table A-39: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.36 pin assignment ................... A-53
Table A-40: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.35 pin assignment ................... A-54
Table A-41: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.11/X.24 pin assignment ........... A-54
Table A-42: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, synchronous V.24
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-55
Table A-43: RAP-4B PLATFORM ALARM connector, pin assignment ....................... A-55
Table A-44: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin assignment............................... A-57
426006-2333-013-A05
xi
List of Tables
xii

Maintenance Manual
426006-2333-013-A05
About This Manual

In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... xiii
Intended Audience ........................................................................................... xiii
Document Organization ................................................................................... xiii
Document Conventions ................................................................................... xiv
Related Documentation .................................................................................... xv
Obtaining Technical Documentation ................................................................ xv
Technical Assistance ....................................................................................... xvi
Overview
The BroadGate (BG) BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
Manual (IOMM) describes how to install BG-30 platforms and how to install
and replace hardware components, including cards, modules, and accessories.
Intended Audience
The BG-30 IOMM is intended for installation and other qualified service
personnel responsible for installing the platform and its accessories.
Document Organization
This manual contains the following information:
Installation
Operation
Maintenance
Additional functionality
426006-2333-013-A05
xiii
About This Manual

Maintenance Manual
Document Conventions
When applicable, this manual uses the following conventions.
Convention
Indicates
Example
Bold
Names of windows, dialog

boxes, menus, buttons, and
most other GUI elements
On the Alarms menu...
Menu > Option
Selection from a menu, or

leading to another command
Select Update > View

Objects
Italics
New terms, emphasized text,

and names of manuals and
documents
Examples in text
Borders around text
Notes, cautions, and warnings See examples below
NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying
information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or

interesting points of information.
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or
loss of information.
WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.
LASER WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates
how to avoid personal injury. All personnel involved in
equipment installation, operation, and maintenance must be
aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although
protective devices generally prevent direct exposure to the
beam, personnel must strictly observe the applicable safety
precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into optical
connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.
ESD: Text set off in this manner indicates information on
how to avoid discharge of static electricity and subsequent
damage to the unit.
xiv
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
About This Manual
TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information

and handy hints that can make your task easier.
IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents essential
information to which you must pay attention.
Related Documentation
The following publications may be of assistance to you in the installation and
commissioning processes. Some of these documents present information
supplied in this Installation Manual in greater or lesser detail.
BroadGate Product Line General Description
BroadGate Product Line System Specifications
BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual
BroadGate EMS-BGF User Manual
BroadGate LCT-BGF User Manual
LightSoft Network Management System User Manual
IEC Publication 825 - Laser Safety Requirements
Obtaining Technical
Documentation
To obtain technical documentation related to ECI Telecom products, contact:
ECI Telecom Ltd.
Documentation Department
30 Hasivim St.
Petach Tikva 49130
Israel
Fax: +972-3-9268060
Email: techdoc.feedback@ecitele.com
426006-2333-013-A05
xv
About This Manual

Maintenance Manual
Technical Assistance
The configuration, installation, and operation of the BG-30 and its operation in
a network are highly specialized processes. Due to the different nature of each
installation, some planning aspects may not be covered in this manual.
If you have questions or concerns about your network design or if you require
installation personnel to perform the actual installation process, ECI Telecom
maintains a staff of design engineers and highly trained field service personnel.
The services of this group are available to customers at any time.
If you are interested in obtaining design assistance or a network installation
plan from ECI Telecom's Customer Support team, contact your ECI Telecom
sales representative. With any support related issues, technical or logistic,
please contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support center at your location. If
you are not familiar with that location, please contact our central customer
support center action line at:
Telephone
+972-3-9266000
Telefax
+972-3-9266370
Email
on.support@ecitele.com
ECI Telecom's BroadGate and XDM product lines are

certified to comply with MEF9 and MEF14 standards.
xvi
426006-2333-013-A05
1
Introduction
In this chapter:
BG-30 Platform Overview............................................................................... 1-1
BG-30 Platform Overview

ECI Telecoms BG-30 delivers a cost-effective and affordable mix of Ethernet,
SDH, PDH, and PCM services that result in new revenue-generating
opportunities. It offers a wide variety of features and benefits, including:
High traffic survivability through main hardware duplication.
Ultra-high scalability based on coupling the BG-30E to the BG-30B to

make a build-as-you-grow solution.
Gradual capacity expansion based on service provisioning needs from

ADM1 up to ADM16.
Ability to add interfaces easily while the network element (NE) is working
by plugging in appropriate cards ranging from E1 cards for multiple ports
to STM-4 cards.
Carrier class Ethernet-over-WAN/MAN solution with SDH reliability,

security, and management of data services.
Sublambda grooming for high utilization of existing fiber and top

efficiency in transmission of different types of services.
PCM service interfaces and 1/0 digital cross-connect functions to facilitate

the construction and maintenance of various private networks.
426006-2333-013-A05
1-1
Introduction

Maintenance Manual
Multi-ADM and cross-connect functionality, ideal for deployment in

flexible network topologies like ring, mesh, and star.
Compactness and resiliency, making it perfectly suited for both indoor and
outdoor enclosures. Due to its extended operating temperature range, it is
also most suitable for harsh environmental conditions.
Figure 1-1: Typical BG-30 platform
1-2
426006-2333-013-A05
2
Before You Start
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Site Preparation ............................................................................................... 2-4
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 2-6
Installing BG-30 in Racks ............................................................................... 2-6
Preparing Cables and Fibers ............................................................................ 2-9
Work and Equipment Safety.......................................................................... 2-16
Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge ................................................... 2-22
Overview
This chapter contains important information that will help you carry out a safe
and trouble-free installation.
Outline of the Installation Procedure

The the following table describes the main steps involved in the installation of
BG-30 equipment. Consult your site installation plans for specific details.
Table 2-1: Typical BG-30 equipment installation sequence
No.
Task
Reference
Prepare the installation site and check the

physical location, environmental compliance,
and availability of power sources.
Before You Start (page 2-1)
Prepare power, alarm, management, and

transmission cables at the installation site.
Before You Start (page 2-1)

and Equipment Installation
(page 3-1)
426006-2333-013-A05
2-1
Before You Start
No.
2-2

Maintenance Manual
Task
Reference
Route the required power, alarm, management,

and transmission cables to the intended BG-30
equipment location.
Equipment Installation (page

3-1)
If required, install the equipment racks.

3-1)
Mark the location of each BG-30 platform,

relevant accessories (Fiber Storage Tray
[FST], Optical Distribution Frame [ODF],
Digital Distribution Frame [DDF], and
MCP30 Interconnection Panel
[ICP_MCP30]) on each rack, in accordance
with the site installation plan.
Notes:
For BG-30B-only installation, it is
recommended you leave at least 4 U of
space above the platform to enable future
installation of the BG-30E.
The BG-30B can only support balanced E1
interfaces directly. For unbalanced E1s, the
xDDF-21 patch panel must be configured,
which provides conversion between
balanced and unbalanced E1s for 21 x E1s.
When auxiliary interfaces like RS-232,
orderwire (OW), or V.11 are used in your
application, the ICP_MCP30 should be
installed in order to distribute the
concentrated Auxiliary connector into
dedicated connectors for each function.

3-1)
When applicable, install the EMS-BGF

management station.
EMS-BGF Installation Guide
Install the Rack Alarm Panel (RAP) and other

equipment needed in each rack.

3-1)
Install the BG-30 platforms in the appropriate

rack.
Equipment Installation page 31)
For each BG-30 platform where optical modules Equipment Installation (page
are used, install an FST under the BG-30
3-1)
platform and route the optical fibers to the FST.
Note: Even if you are not currently installing an
FST, it is recommended that you leave enough
space beneath the BG-30 platform to enable
future installation.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
No.
Task
Before You Start
Reference
10
Install the prescribed modules in the BG-30B

platform, including two INF_30B or INF_30BH
modules, FCU_30B or FCU_30BH, MCP30,
two XIO30 modules (XIO30_1, XIO30Q_1&4,
XIO30_4, or XIO30_16), and optional Tslot
modules.
Install the prescribed modules in the BG-30E
platform, including two INF_30E modules,
FCU_30E, or other extension cards, such as the
PE1_63, P345_3E, SM_10E, and
ESW_2G_8F_E.
11
Install the SFP modules for XIO30 modules.

3-1)
12
Depending on the modules or cards in your

BG-30 platform:
Route the PDH electrical cables from the
DDF to the E1 interfaces on the front panel
of PME1_21 modules, the E3/DS-3
interfaces on the front panel of PM345_3
modules, and STM-1e interfaces on the
STM-1 electrical SFPs.
Route the data cables to the Fast Ethernet
(FE) interfaces on the front panel of
DMFE_4_L1 modules.
If the ICP_MCP30 is installed, route the
special cables to connect the ICP_MCP30
and the MCP30, and route cables for
interfaces on the ICP_MCP30 panel. If the
ICP_MCP30 is not installed and external
alarms interfaces are used, route the special
Alarms cable from the MCP30 Auxiliary
connector to the RAP.
Note: The DDF can be installed on the same
rack as the BG-30 platform, or on a different
rack.

3-1)
13
Connect management cables between the

equipment installed in the rack and the
management station.

3-1)
14
Connect power cables from the RAP panel to

each BG-30 platform installed in the rack.

3-1)
426006-2333-013-A05
2-3
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Site Preparation
Perform a preliminary survey of the installation site, taking the following into
consideration:
System environmental requirements
Physical location of the BG-30 platforms
Location of power sources
Types of interfaces used at the site (optical, electrical, management, alarm

monitoring, and so on)
Work and equipment safety requirements
Environmental Requirements
The environmental conditions listed in the following table are applicable to
BG-30 equipment and must be ensured at the installation site.
Table 2-2: Environmental requirements
Parameter
Compliance requirements
Electromagnetic interference
EN 55022/94, EN 50082-1/92
Temperature
ETSI ETS 300-19-2-3 Test Spec. T3.1
Physical Location
WARNING: BG-30 platforms are intended for installation in
restricted-access areas only.
Before you start:

Choose the physical location of the BG-30 platforms, taking the following
aspects into consideration:
1. Equipment dimensions (see the following table).
2. Required floor loading capability: 100 kg for a typical eight-platform
installation.
3. Routing requirements for grounding, power, alarm monitoring,
management cables, and optical fibers. To ensure convenient access to
cables and fibers, it is recommended, whenever possible, to use overhead
cable ladders to bring the cables/fibers to the top of each rack.
2-4
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
4. When a network management station, for example, the EMS-BGF, is

installed on the site, consider the method of connection to the local network
management station and the maximum allowed distance.
Table 2-3: Equipment dimensions
Equipment type
Height (mm) Width (mm)
Depth (mm)
Max. weight (kg)
BG-30B
44.4
440
243
BG-30E
88.9
443.4
243
4.5
RAP-BG
88
440
150
RAP-4B
88
447
155
2.4
FST
44.5
440
240
ODF
44.5
440
240
xDDF-21
44.5
440
150
1.5
ICP_MCP30
44
440
140
1.5
Power Sources
BG-30 platforms can be powered by DC sources complying with the applicable
sections of ETSI 300 132-2 and the SELV or TNV requirements of EN 60950.
The nominal supply voltage is -48 VDC (positive-lead grounded). However,
the allowed supply voltage range is -40.5 VDC to -60 VDC. Two separate DC
power sources must be available for redundancy. In the DC power supply, the
maximum power consumption of the BG-30B is 55 W.
For AC power supply, configure an external AC/DC converter.
NOTE: If the planned power consumption of the equipment
installed in the platform is 80% or more of the maximum
listed value, it is recommended to consult ECI Telecom
Customer Support.
426006-2333-013-A05
2-5
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Tools and Test Equipment

No special-purpose tools beyond a standard technicians toolbox are required
for the installation of BG-30 platforms.
Traffic cables can be prepared on site, so make sure suitable tool kits are
available. They include tools for the assembly of coaxial cables as listed in the
following table, and tools for the preparation of optical patch cords.
Table 2-4: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools
No.
Name
Description
Stripper
DIN 1.0/2.3
Center contact crimp tool (blue)
DIN 1.0/2.3
Crimp tool, outer
DIN 1.0/2.3
Cable stripper
---
Nipper (cutter for center contact)
---
Die for NCX1
---
Cleaning Optical Connectors

When handling optical fibers, clean the optical connectors with the standard
cleaning kits recommended by the manufacturers.
Installing BG-30 in Racks

Installation Plan
Follow these guidelines for installing BG-30 platforms and ancillary equipment
in racks.
We recommend installation in ECI Telecom ETSI racks, which provide the
following advantages:
2-6
Removable rear and side panels, enabling tidy leading and efficient
maintenance of all rack cables, including:
PCM/E1/E3/DS-3/STM-1e cables
Control cables
Power cables
Data cables
Voice frequency cables
Timing cables
Two ducts on the racks front rails for routing up to 200 optical fibers
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Open frame top and bottom, facilitating easy leading of cables from
suspension floors and/or ceiling ladders
Front door mountable for left or right opening
BG-30 equipment racks can be installed on wooden, concrete, or floating

floors, or suspended from overhead mountings.
Typical BG-30 Installation

See the figure Typical installation of four BG-30 platforms in an ETSI 2200
rack (page 2-8) for a typical installation in an ECI Telecom rack.
In addition to the BG-30B platform,you can also install the following
equipment in the rack:
One RAP at the top of the rack to connect external power and alarm
monitoring lines (RAP-4B only) to the BG-30B platforms in the rack. The
RAP fully supports up to four platforms with dual power feeding. In
addition to the space needed for RAP installation, you must leave at least
50 mm of free space under the RAP for cable routing.
NOTE: The RAP-BG does not support alarm monitoring
lines.
One FST for each BG-30 with optical modules. Each FST contains two
storage reels, enabling the fiber to be stored on the right or left side of the
tray. Leave at least 50 mm of free space between the BG-30 platform and
its FST, and another 50 mm free between the FST and the next BG-30
platform.
xDDF-21. When unbalanced E1 interfaces are needed, the xDDF-21 must

be installed with the BG-30. Each xDDF-21 can support 21 channels of E1.
The xDDF-21 can be installed anywhere on the same rack as the BG-30
platform or on another rack.
ICP_MCP30. When an RS-232 or V.11 interface from the MCP30 is used,

the ICP_MPC30 must be installed to distribute the concentrated Auxiliary
connector into dedicated connectors for each function. The ICP_MCP30
can be installed anywhere on the same rack as the BG-30 platform.
426006-2333-013-A05
2-7
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Integrating BG-30 Platforms and Other

Equipment in One Rack
When BG-30 platforms and associated accessories do not occupy the entire
rack, additional equipment can be installed in the remaining rack space. Make
sure that any heat generated by this equipment can be dissipated efficiently,
and that thermal isolation is provided between the various equipment units.
In the event of additional equipment being installed in the rack, contact ECI
Telecoms Customer Support team for assistance.
Figure 2-1: Typical installation of four BG-30 platforms in an ETSI 2200 rack
2-8
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Preparing Cables and Fibers

NOTE: This section provides information for preparing
cables and optical fibers. The necessary cables can be ordered

from ECI Telecom. For details, contact ECI Telecoms
Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom sales
representative.
Before you start:

The following main types of cables are required for installing the BG-30:
Grounding cables (page 2-10)
DC power cables (RAP Input Power Cables (page 2-10) and Platform
Power Cables (page 2-11))
Alarm cables (page 2-11)
Management cables (page 2-11)
Timing (clock) cables (page 2-12)
Optical fibers (page 2-14)
Electric traffic cables (page 2-12)
Some of these cables are supplied as part of the BG-30 equipment, while others
must be prepared on site or ordered separately from ECI Telecom.
In the following sections, you will find information about the cables, and how
to prepare them on site, where relevant. For details about the equipment
connector types and cable wiring, see Connection Data (page A-1).
WARNING: When preparing cables, in particular power and
grounding cables, use only UL-listed components of the
specified types. Components must also comply with any
applicable national and local safety codes and regulations.
Only qualified trained personnel may be involved in the
preparation of the various cable types. Personnel must use
only approved procedures, in accordance with the applicable
workmanship practice.
426006-2333-013-A05
2-9
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Grounding Cables
Platform grounding is achieved by connecting the platform to the rack using
rack mounting brackets. Grounding is provided by contact when the unit is
fastened to the rack.
A reliable low-impedance connection must be provided using copper
conductors between the rack frame and the site grounding bus.
Make the connection between the rack grounding screw and the site grounding
bus with a 2 AWG (35 mm2) or thicker copper lead with yellow/green
insulation, in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations.
Route grounding conductors along the shortest possible route. Treat the bare
portion of the conductor with antioxidant and connect a listed two-hole
compression lug. If the lug is not plated, polish it until it has a bright finish and
coat it with antioxidant before connecting it to the frame of the rack. Do not
mix different types of metal conductors.
DC Power Cables
DC power cables must be prepared on site. Two types of DC power cables are
needed:
RAP input power cables
Platform power cables
ECI Telecom recommends the use of shielded power cables for DC power
connections, with the shields connected to the frame ground at the rack end
only.
RAP Input Power Cables

The RAP input power cables are prepared on site. They connect input power
from the site power distribution subsystem to the DC input terminals of the
RAP.
Two input power cables are required for each rack, one for each source. The
cables must use copper leads complying with UL/ETSI recommendations. Use
a red lead for the positive conductor and a black lead for the negative
conductor. The RAP cable ends must be terminated in M6 cable lugs matching
the conductor gauge.
The recommended cable gauge is 25 mm or thicker. This gauge ensures that
the voltage drop across the rack power cable does not exceed 2 V, even for
cable runs of maximum 30 meters connected to a RAP and providing power to
multiple BG-30 platforms.
2-10
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
When the RAP is used to provide power to a single BG-30 platform, lower-lead
gauges may be used, as follows:
For runs not exceeding 20 meters, use 10 mm2 copper leads.
For runs not exceeding 30 meters, use 16 mm2 copper leads.
Platform Power Cables

One 12 AWG cable, supplied by ECI Telecom, connects the input power from
the rack RAP unit to the POWER IN connector on each INF_30B or
INF_30BH module of each BG-30B platform installed in the rack.
Alarm Cables
Alarm cables used within BG-30 equipment are included in the shipment
according to site specifications.
The alarm indications are carried by the platform alarm indication cable. One
platform alarm indication cable is required for each BG-30 platform installed in
the rack. There are two types of alarm cable. If the ICP_MCP30 is not
installed, an alarm cable connects between the Auxiliary connector on the
MCP30 and one of the Alarms connectors on the RAP (RAP-4B only). If the
ICP_MCP30 is installed, another alarm cable connects between the Alarms
connector on the ICP_MCP30 and one of the Alarms connectors on the RAP
(RAP-4B only). Cable length is 2 m.
NOTE: There are no Alarms connectors on the RAP-BG.
Management Cables
Out-of-band management traffic is connected to a BG-30 platform via the
RJ-45 (MNG) connector located on the front panel of the MCP30.
The MNG Ethernet connector is wired as a 10BaseT station port for direct
connection through an RJ-45-to-RJ-45 straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT
Ethernet hub.
Suitable standard Ethernet station cables are available from many sources.
Cables of Category 5 or better must be used. In all cases, the length of the
cables must not exceed the maximum recommended for the cable type and hub
port in use (up to a few dozen meters).
426006-2333-013-A05
2-11
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Timing (Clock) Cables

The BG-30 platform uses an RJ-45 connector on the MCP30 front panel that
integrates the two timing reference interfaces (2 x T3 and 2 x T4). If it has
balanced (120 ) G.703 interfaces, a multi twisted-pair cable with an RJ-45
connector (supplied by ECI Telecom) is used to connect timing signals from
the BG-30 to the site timing reference distribution subsystems.
If the site timing reference distribution subsystem has unbalanced (75 ) G.703
interfaces, configure an adapter with coaxial cables that provides
balanced-to-unbalanced conversion (supplied by ECI Telecom).
Electric Traffic Cables

Some electric traffic cables can be prepared on site. The following table lists
the type of cables and mating connectors needed for each BG-30 traffic
interface type.
Table 2-5: Traffic cables mating connector data for BG-30B
Module or
card
Interface type
Cable type
Mating connector
Connector at
other end
Qty./Module
PME1_21
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Multipair cable
(2 x 21 120
twisted pairs)
100-pin SCSI
male
Open
PME1_21 1
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair
cable (2 x 21
120 twisted
pairs)
100-pin SCSI
male
2 x 50-pin
SCSI male
PME1_63
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps
3 x twin
multipair cable
(2 x 21 120 W
twisted pairs)
2 x 136-pin
VHDCI
Open
(connects to
DDF)
xDDF-21
E1 unbalanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open
(prepared in
the field)
42
PM345_3
E3/DS-3 (34/45
Mbps)
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open
(prepared in
the field)
SMD1B 2
STM-1 electrical
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3 (on

electrical SFP)
Open
(prepared in
the field)
2/4
SMQ1 3
STM-1e
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open
(prepared in
the field)
Cable is used to connect the PME1_21 E1 interface connector to the xDDF-21.

Electrical or optical SFPs can be used when working in STM-1; the cable type is determined according to the SFP
used.
3
Cables are required when electrical SFPs are used in the module.
2
2-12
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Module or
card
Interface type
Cable type
Mating connector
Connector at
other end
SMQ1&4 4
STM-1e
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open
(prepared in
the field)
XIO30_1/4 5
STM-1 electrical
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open
(prepared in
the field)
XIO30Q_
1&4
STM-1e
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open
(prepared in
the field)
DMEOP_4
100BaseT
Cat.5e
RJ-45
RJ-45
Cat.5e
RJ-45
RJ-45
10/100/1000Base Cat.5e
T
RJ-45
RJ-45
DMGE_2_L2 8 10/100/1000Base Cat.5e

T
RJ-45
RJ-45
DMGE_4_L2 9 10/100/1000Base Cat.5e

T
RJ-45
RJ-45
DMGE_1_L1 6 1000BaseT
DMGE_4_L1
Qty./Module
Table 2-6: Traffic cables mating connector data for BG-30E

Module or
card
Interface type
Cable type
Mating connector
Connector at
other end
Qty./Module
PE1_63
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Multipair cable
(2 x 21 120
twisted pairs)
2 x 50-pin SCSI
male
Open
PM345_3E
E3/DS-3 (34/45 Coaxial cable

Mbps)
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open
(prepared in
the field)
MPS_2G_8F
10/100/1000Ba
seT
Cat.5e
RJ-45
RJ-45
10
TP21_2
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair
cable (2 x 21
120 twisted
pairs)
Twin 2 x 68-pin
VHDCI male
Open
(prepared in
the field)
TP21_2 10
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair
cable (2 x 21
120 twisted
pairs)
Twin 2 x 68-pin
VHDCI male
100-pin SCSI
male
TP63_1
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair
cable (2 x 21
120 twisted
pairs)
Twin 2 x 68-pin
VHDCI male
Open
(prepared in
the field)
Electrical or optical SFPs can be used when working in STM-1; the cable type is determined according to the SFP
used.
6
Cable is required when the DMGE_1_L1 is working in electrical mode (RJ-45).
7
8
9
10
Cable is used to connect protection PME1_21 E1 interfaces connector to the TP21_2.
5
426006-2333-013-A05
2-13
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Module or
card
Interface type
Cable type
Mating connector
Connector at
other end
Qty./Module
TP63_1 11
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair
cable (2 x 21
120 twisted
pairs)
Twin 2 x 68-pin
VHDCI male
Twin 2 x
68-pin
VHDCI male
TPS1_1
STM-1e/
E3/DS3
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open
(prepared in
the field)
TPS1_1 12
STM-1e/
E3/DS3
Coaxial cable
DB 8W8P
DIN 1.0/2.3
xDDF-21
E1 unbalanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open
(prepared in
the field)
42
Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be prepared on site. The following table lists the type of
cables and mating connectors needed to prepare cables for each BG-30 module.
For each optical interface, ECI Telecom supplies patch cords with mating
optical connectors already attached to the fiber. Therefore, only the optical
termination on the ODF side, which is installation-dependent, must be installed
on site.
The optical fibers for connecting to equipment installed in a given rack must
enter the rack from the top, be threaded through cable guides running along the
rack side rails, and end at the FST. The FST must contain enough fiber length
for extracting modules from the BG-30 and for replacing fiber in case of
damage (splicing repairs).
When routing fibers, make sure to observe the minimum bending radius (35
mm).
Table 2-7: Optical fibers and mating connector data for BG-30B
11
12
I/O module
Interface type
Fiber type
Mating
connector
Qty./Module
SMD1B
STM-1 optical
One pair of fiber patch cords per

interface
LC male
4 fibers
SMQ1
STM-1 optical

interface
LC male
8 fibers
SMQ1&4
STM-1&4
optical

interface
LC male
8 fibers
SMS4
STM-4 optical
One pair of fiber patch cords
LC male
2 fibers
SMD4
STM-4 optical

interface
LC male
4 fibers
SMS16
STM-16 optical One pair of fiber patch cords per

interface
LC male
2 fibers
Cable is used to connect protection PE1_63 or PME1_21 E1 interfaces connector to the TP63_1
Cable is used to connect protection card interfaces connector to the TPS1_1
2-14
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
I/O module
Interface type
Fiber type
Mating
connector
Qty./Module
XIO30_1
STM-1 optical

interface
OR
One fiber patch cord per
interface if a bidirectional SFP
module is used
LC male
2 fibers
OR
1 fibers (if a
bidirectional SFP
module is used)
XIO30Q_1&4
STM-1&4
optical

interface
LC male
8 fibers
XIO30_4
STM-4 optical

interface
LC male
4 fibers
XIO30_16
STM-16 optical One pair of fiber patch cords per

interface
LC male
2 fibers
DMFX_4_L1
100BaseFX

interface
LC male
8 fibers
DMGE_1_L1 13
1000BaseFX

interface
LC male
2 fibers
DMGE_4_L1 14
1000BaseFX

interface
LC male
8 fibers
DMFX_4_L2
100BaseFX

interface
LC male
8 fibers
DMGE_2_L2 15
1000BaseFX

interface
LC male
4 fibers
Table 2-8: Optical fibers and mating connector data for BG-30E
I/O module
Interface type
Fiber type
Mating
connector
Qty./Module
S1_4
STM-1 optical

interface
LC male
S4_1
STM-4 optical
One pair of fiber patch cords
LC male
ESW_2G_8F_E
GbE optical

interface
LC male
MPS_2G_8F
GbE optical

interface
LC male
13
Fibers are required when DMGE_1_L1 is working in SFP mode. Multimode fiber for 1000BaseSX, and single
mode fiber for 1000BaseLX/ZX.
14
Fibers are required when DMGE_4_L1/DMGE_2_L2 interfaces are working in 1000BaseFX mode. The fiber type
must be multimode.
15
Fibers are required when DMGE_4_L1/DMGE_2_L2 interfaces are working in 1000BaseFX mode. The fiber type
must be multimode.
426006-2333-013-A05
2-15
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Work and Equipment Safety

NOTE: BG-30 equipment is intended for installation in
restricted-access areas only.
BG-30 platforms contain power sources of varying voltages. Note the
following guidelines when installing the platforms:
Before you start:
2-16
Ensure the integrity of the grounding connections.
Make sure that sufficient lighting is available.
Do not work on any equipment connected to a voltage source (DC or AC).
Ensure that the maximum working temperature does not exceed 70C.
Use only insulated tools.
Wear protective clothing as required by the requisite safety regulations.
Do not install or maintain equipment connected to external lines (for

example, E1 tributaries) during thunderstorms.
Avoid contact with high-voltage sources when installing platforms, cards,

and modules.
Make sure you are familiar with the warning signals and labels on the
equipment and strictly observe the procedures needed to avoid the indicated
hazards.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Grounding Requirements
All the equipment, including BG-30 platforms, ancillary units, and equipment
from other vendors, must be properly grounded at all times. Good equipment
grounding is necessary to protect personnel and equipment, minimize noise,
and allow the discharge of accumulated static charges to earth.
Rack Grounding Requirements

Connect the rack to the site grounding bar with a ground cable according to
ETSI recommendations (top/bottom connection).
The rack is supplied with a main copper or brass grounding bolt welded to the
rack frame. The grounding stud is identified on the rack by the ground symbol
label.
The rack grounding bolt must be connected to the site grounding bar by a 35
mm2 (2 AWG) grounding cable or thicker, as short as possible, complying with
UL/ETSI recommendations. The bolt must be free of paint. The cable must be
made of copper strands and terminated on both sides with bolt terminals.
NOTE: If necessary, the gauge of the grounding lead can also
be reduced to the gauge of the RAP power leads.
The rack mounting rails must be free of paint and provide electrical continuity
to the main grounding bolt. The resistance between any rail and the rack main
grounding bolt must be less than 0.1 .
Pay particular attention to the area in which the RAP is attached. Remove paint
from the rack in this area to ensure efficient electrical contact.
CAUTION: Connect the RAP grounding bolt to the rack
grounding bolt with a grounding cable complying with

UL/ETSI recommendations. The cable must include bolt
terminals on both ends and be securely fastened with a nut
and a star washer.
426006-2333-013-A05
2-17
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Power Supply Requirements

The BG-30B, BG-30E, and EXT-2U platforms require two power sources with
a nominal voltage of -48 VDC. Each power source is protected by a UL-listed
circuit breaker installed in the RAP. The required circuit breakers are included
in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment, and therefore, their
current rating is in accordance with the order.
The site operator must provide a readily accessible UL-listed disconnect device
incorporated in the fixed power wiring of the site. This device limits the
maximum delivered current to a safe value.
Table 2-9: BG-30B/E and EXT-2U circuit breaker data
Platform ID
Platform-to-RAP
connection type
Circuit
breaker
amps
BG-30B
One cable per

INF_30B or
INF_30BH input
8A
One cable per

INF_30E input
5A
BG-30E
Quantity per platform
EXT-2U
One cable per

INF_E2U input
16A
2-18
Expanded set
One Y cable per
(BG-30B+BG-3 set
0E)
12A
Expanded set
One Y cable per
(BG-30B+EXT- set
2U)
24A
One for nonredundant

powering
Two for redundant powering
powering
powering
powering
powering
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Laser Safety Requirements

Laser Classification
The equipment and components with laser devices described in this manual
comply with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety
standards, including IEC-60825-1 - Safety of Laser Products (AS/NZS 2211.2)
and IEC-825 Safety of Optical Fiber Communication Systems.
With specific regard to the laser, BG-30 equipment complies with laser product
performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products.
The product and its accessories do not emit hazardous light, and the beam is
totally enclosed during all operating modes and maintenance.
Warning Labels for Laser Products

The following labels are affixed to the platform front panel. The labels indicate
that the product is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product, Hazard Class 1M.
Figure 2-2: Laser warning label
Laser Safety Statutory Warning

All personnel involved in equipment installation and maintenance must be
aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective devices
generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly observe
the applicable safety precautions and in particular must avoid staring into
optical connectors, either directly or through optical instruments.
426006-2333-013-A05
2-19
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Laser Device Operating Precautions

In addition to the general precautions described in this section, be sure to
observe the following warnings when operating a product equipped with a laser
device. Failure to observe these warnings could result in fire, bodily injury, and
damage to the equipment.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous
radiation, note the following:
When performing maintenance and other activities on

equipment using lasers, it is recommended that you use
protection goggles for the wavelength range of 1300 nm to
1600 nm.
Only authorized personnel must carry out hot insertion or
swapping of an optical module or optical interface
module.
To prevent irremediable damage to your eyes, avoid
looking into the fiber when hot-removing and/or inserting
a fiber termination.
Place plastic covers on module fiber ports and fiber
terminations that are not currently in use.
Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform
procedures associated with the laser device other than
those specified herein.
It is strictly forbidden to interfere with any protective devices

and interlocks that are used to prevent direct exposure to the
laser beam.
Laser Information
Information regarding the various optical modules available for the BG-30
platform is provided in the following tables.
Table 2-10: LC transceivers laser information STM-4 SFP
2-20
Module
Parameter
Data
STM-4 SFP
Laser designation
S3
L3
L5
Operating wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1550
Source type
Single mode Single

mode
Single
mode
Minimum mean launched

power (dBm)
-15
-3
-3
Maximum mean launched

power (dBm)
-8
+2
+2
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Table 2-11: LC transceivers laser information STM-1/100BaseFX SFP

Module
Parameter
Data
STM-1 SFP
Laser designation
S3
L3
L5
BD 3 16 BD 5 17
Operating
wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1550
1310
1550
Source type
Single
mode
Single
mode
Single
mode
Single
mode
Single
mode
Minimum mean
launched power (dBm)
-15
-5
-5
-14
-14
Maximum mean
launched power (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
Table 2-12: LC transceivers laser information GbE SFP (OTGBE)

Module
Parameter
Data
GbE SFP
Laser designation
SX
LX
L5
Operating
wavelength (nm)
850
1310
1550
Source type
Multi mode
Single mode Single mode
Minimum mean launched

power (dBm)
-9.5
-11
-3
Maximum mean launched -3

power (dBm)
16
17
Single-fiber bidirectional transceivers with a transmit wavelength of 1310 nm.

Single-fiber bidirectional transceivers with a transmit wavelength of 1550 nm.
426006-2333-013-A05
2-21
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Protection Against Electrostatic

Discharge
This section provides guidelines regarding the protection of BG-30 equipment
and its components against electrostatic discharge (ESD) during handling,
packing/unpacking, transport, installation, commissioning, inspections,
servicing, and maintenance.
Electronic equipment, assemblies, and components that are ESDS (electrostatic
discharge sensitive) or include sensitive items are identified by the basic ESD
warning symbol shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-3: Basic ESD warning symbol
The information provided in this section is in line with CENELEC Electronic

Components Committee (CECC) specification CECC 00 015, which deals with
protection of devices sensitive to ESD.
Most types of electronic equipment, assemblies, and components can be
damaged by electrostatic discharges. An ESD between two objects occurs
when an object carrying static electrical charges touches or is brought near
another object.
Static electrical charges appear as a result of friction between surfaces of
insulating materials or separation of two such surfaces, and may also be
induced by electrical fields. Routine activities such as walking across an
insulating floor, friction between garment parts, friction between objects, and
so on, can easily build up charges to levels that may cause damage, especially
when humidity is low.
In many cases, the build-up of charge can be avoided by using special
materials, for example, garments and packaging of antistatic materials or
materials that have high resistance, but yet are not insulators.
The best way to avoid damage by ESD is a combination of means and
procedures that achieves the following goals:
Avoids build-up of electrostatic charges
Creates a protected work environment that helps prevent ESD
Provides means for controlled discharge of any accumulated electrostatic

charges when entering the protected work environment
NOTE: An area in which ESDS can be handled with
minimum risk of damage as a result of ESD or fields, and in
which the operator is not exposed to additional risks, is called
an ESD Protected Area (EPA).
2-22
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Personnel Training
During production and assembly, equipment is handled in workspaces
especially prepared and certified to serve as a permanent EPA. However, in
many cases, the environment in which the same equipment is installed or
maintained cannot be assumed to form an EPA with a permanently controlled
boundary. Therefore, all the work involving handling of unprotected ESD must
be considered as field work.
Field work in this context includes such activities as service and maintenance,
installation, site inspections, and commissioning of components and assemblies
classified as ESDS, together with associated packing and unpacking activities.
All the staff involved in field work must be trained to perform their work in the
same way as that performed in permanent EPAs with respect to the material
quality, personal responsibilities, training, labeling, and packing.
Use of a Temporary EPA

Where necessary, use a temporary EPA. The EPA toolkit includes:
Wrist strap with 1 M series resistor
Bonding strap with 1 M series resistor
ESD carpet (work surface), 0.25 m2 minimum
The temporary EPA must include temporary controlled work surfaces and/or
flooring capable of providing protection against ESD.
CAUTION: The temporary EPA must be constructed in a way
that ensures electrical bonding of all the materials used, and
prevents the occurrence of any sudden changes in potential
within the EPA that could cause unacceptable voltages or
discharges to be applied to ESDS.
The operator and any work surface and flooring must be bonded to ground
equipotentially. For this purpose, the work surface and wrist straps must be
bonded either to a designated ground bonding point or to the equipment being
serviced.
Whenever available, the mains ground serves as the ESD grounding facility.
WARNING: While the operator is within the temporary EPA,
the minimum value of resistance used for bonding to ground
must limit the current to ground, produced by voltages
accessible to the operator, to limits specified as safe by the
applicable regulations (see, for example, CECC 00 015). The
same approach is applicable to the surface resistance and
resistance to ground of materials used for temporary work
surfaces and flooring.
426006-2333-013-A05
2-23
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
To enable ESD bonding to ground of equipment racks and any other

nonmoveable equipment containing ESD, an ESD ground-bonding facility
must be located near such equipment, or the equipment must be fitted with a
designated ground-bonding point presenting a resistance to ground not greater
than 1 M.
Work Arrangements within a Temporary

EPA
To ensure that effective ESD protection is indeed achieved, the following
arrangements must be observed by persons entering and/or performing field
work within a temporary EPA:
2-24
All operators working within a temporary EPA must wear, as a minimum,

an ESD antistatic protecting garment made of cotton.
If the extent of the temporary work area is such that the operator needs to
walk and move within that area, the floor of the area must be capable of
providing protection against ESD.
The operator must be bonded to ground at all times when handling ESDS.
If it becomes necessary to remove ESDS equipment and transfer it to a

temporary work surface away from the other equipment, the ESDS must be
given protective packaging unless equipotential bonding to ground of the
operator is maintained.
An ESDS unit must be placed directly into protective packaging when it is

removed from equipment. A replacement ESDS must be kept in its
protective packaging until required for immediate installation in the
equipment.
The field service operator must ensure that the materials and tools
necessary to maintain and control the temporary EPA are available at the
place of the field work at service time.
All tools for use within the EPA must, as far as is practical, be constructed
so that they do not generate or hold an induced electrostatic charge.
426006-2333-013-A05
3
Installing Equipment
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 3-1
Preliminary Preparations ................................................................................. 3-2
Installation Sequence ....................................................................................... 3-2
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................. 3-5
Installation Options.......................................................................................... 3-6
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ................................................................. 3-8
Installing the BG-30B Platform in the Rack.................................................. 3-31
Installing the BG-30E Platform in the Rack .................................................. 3-47
Installing the EXT-2U Platform in the Rack ................................................. 3-61
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the BG-30 Shelf ........................................ 3-73
Overview
This chapter provides general instructions for installing the BG-30 and
auxiliary equipment.
The procedures for equipment replacement and upgrades are similar to those
for installation, and when relevant, notes regarding live replacement or upgrade
are inserted in these procedures.
Use the information in this chapter in conjunction with specific site installation
plans in a particular customer network. If you are interested in obtaining design
or installation assistance from ECI Telecoms Customer Support team or wish
to prepare a network installation plan, contact your ECI Telecom sales
representative.
The BG-30 platforms, cards, modules, and ancillary equipment are described in
the BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-1

Maintenance Manual
Preliminary Preparations
The installation procedures assume that:
The sites at which installation is to be carried out comply with the

requirements listed in Site Preparation (page 2-4).
The preliminary preparations specified in Before You Start have been

completed.
Before you start, determine what equipment is to be installed in the rack by

referring to the site installation plan, and note the exact position of each unit.
To avoid errors, it is recommended that you mark the prescribed positions on
the rack rails using a soft pencil.
Installation Sequence
Each component of the BG-30 system is supplied separately and must be
installed in the correct sequence according to the site plan.
A typical installation might include the equipment illustrated in the following
figure. The different components are described according to the installation
steps.
NOTE: If you are not installing an FST for a particular BG-30
platform, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the
rack in case optical modules are added in the future. If you
are not installing a BG-30E for a particular BG-30B platform,
it is highly recommended that you leave enough empty space
(about 5 U) above the BG-30B platform in case one is added
in the future.
CAUTION:
3-2
If additional equipment is used in the rack, a heat buffer or

a buffer plate must be installed between such equipment
and the BG-30 platform to minimize the transfer of heat
from platform to platform. This heat buffer must be
purchased from ECI Telecom.
During the installation of equipment in the rack, make
sure all the optical connectors are closed by protective
caps. Do not remove the cap until an optical fiber is
connected to the corresponding connector.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-1: Typical installation of a single BG-30 platform in a 2200 ETSI rack
NOTE: The FST must be installed below the BG-30B. If the

BG-30E is not installed, reserve space above the BG-30B for
it.
Depending on the specific equipment being installed, the installation of a
BG-30 system comprises the following stages, listed in order of execution.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-3

Maintenance Manual
Table 3-1: Outline of typical BG-30B equipment installation sequence

Step
3-4
Procedure
Install a rack (if required).
Unpack and perform a visual inspection.
Install ancillary equipment in the rack, including:

RAP unit
FST (optional)
Optional ODF units
Optional DDF units
Optional ICP_MCP30 unit
Install the BG-30B platform in the rack.
Install the BG-30B modules in the BG-30B platform. BG-30B modules

include:
2 x INF_30B or INF_30BH, 1 x FCU_30B or FCU_30BH, 1 x MCP30, 2 x
XIO30 cards (XIO30_1, XIO30Q_1&4, XIO30_4, or XIO30_16) and
several Tslot modules (such as PME1_21 and DMFE_4_L1).
Install the SFP modules in the BG-30B platform (for XIO30 modules).
Route and connect all cables and fibers, including:

Power and alarm cables
Optical fibers to optical modules transceivers
Traffic cables to electrical cards
Data cables
Timing cables
Management cable
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Unpacking and Performing

Visual Inspection
Before you start:
Before unpacking, make a preliminary inspection of the shipping boxes.
Immediately report evidence of damage to the carrier, the project manager, and
your local ECI Telecom representative.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices
Proper handling and grounding precautions required
BG-30 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD. To
prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions
listed in Protection Against Electronic Discharge (page 2-22).
Keep parts and cards in their antistatic packaging material
until you are ready to install them.
The use of an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded
equipment frame or rack is recommended when handling
cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection
to internal connectors.
Unpack the equipment on a clean flat surface.

To unpack the equipment:
1. Place the shipping boxes with the top upwards, cut the sealing tape using a
short knife so as not to damage the internal items, and open the top flaps.
2. Remove the items contained in the box and inspect each one for damage.
Check for loose parts or any visual damage to the rack, platform, and
auxiliary equipment. Also check the integrity of all the connectors, leads,
and cables.
NOTE: Do not remove plastic covers from optical connectors
until optical cables are connected to them.
3. Search the shipping boxes for any additional small items that may be
present.
4. Open each of the module and card packages for inspection, but do not
remove the modules/cards from their individual protective packages until
they can be inserted in the platform.
5. Check the contents of the shipping boxes against the packing list attached
to each box. If damaged parts are detected or if any parts are missing,
notify the project manager and your local ECI Telecom representative
immediately.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-5

Maintenance Manual
Installation Options
It is recommended that BG-30 platforms be installed in ECI Telecom approved
racks. These racks can be installed on wooden, concrete, or suspended floors,
or suspended from overhead mountings.
The following racks are supported:
Standard 19
Standard ETSI
Open frame
NOTE: BG-30 platforms can also be installed in
standard street cabinets. Consult ECI Telecom for more
details.
By default, the BG-30 is shipped with 19 mounting brackets.
If you are installing in an ETSI rack, ETSI brackets must be
ordered separately and replaced in the field.
You can install up to eight BG-30B platforms in a rack. A typical installation

of four BG-30B platforms in an ETSI 2200 rack is shown in the following
figure.
3-6
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-2: Typical installation of four BG-30B platforms
If necessary, contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support team or your ECI
Telecom sales representative for help in meeting your specific installation
requirements.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-7

Maintenance Manual
Installing Ancillary Units in

Racks
ECI Telecom offers various accessories for efficient and optimal installation in
racks. Contact ECI Telecoms Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom
sales representative for additional items or custom modifications to standard
items.
The specific units you need to install depend on your site installation plan and
may include one or more of the following:
RAP unit: For connecting up to four or eight BG-30 platforms (BG-30 with
BG-30E is counted as two platforms) on the same rack, usually located at
the top. See Installing the RAP-BG (page 3-9) and Installing the RAP-4B
(page 3-15).
FST: Located under the BG-30B platform, recommended for installations

with a large number of optical modules. See Installing the Fiber Storage
Tray (page 3-22).
ODF units: See Installing the ODF (page 3-24).
xDDF-21: This unit must be installed for unbalanced E1 interfaces. See

Installing the xDDF-21 Patch Panel (page 3-27).
ICP_MPC30: This unit is used to distribute the concentrated Auxiliary

connector on the MCP30B panel into dedicated connectors for each
function. See Installing the ICP_MCP30 (page 3-28).
AC_CONV_UNIT: This unit is an AC power platform that can be mounted

separately on the rack. See Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT (page 3-30).
In general, ancillary units are attached to the rack side rails by four M6 Phillips
screws. No preparation is required before installation. The following sections
provide mechanical installation instructions for units that require additional
procedures. Skip sections that are not relevant to your particular application.
CAUTION: If additional equipment (other than BG-30
platforms) is installed in the rack, a heat buffer must be

installed between such equipment and the BG-30 to minimize
the transfer of heat from platform to platform. Consult your
ECI Telecom representative regarding the exact heat buffer
required.
3-8
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing the RAP-BG

Before You Start:
Before connecting DC power cables, see DC Power Cables (page 2-10).
For a description of the RAP-BG, see the BroadGate Product Line Reference
Manual.
To install the RAP-BG:
1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the RAP-BG in the prescribed location.
3. Ground the RAP-BG to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-BG.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the BroadGate platforms to the RAP-BG.
6. Install circuit breakers.
7. Check power wiring.
Preparing DC Input Power Cables

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be

connected with a red cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with
a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead must be
connected with a blue cable and the negative lead with a gray
cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable
connections, use cables of appropriate colors to comply with
the standards in your area of residence.
The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the
RAP-BG source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of
50 mm2 (.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.
NOTE: When the RAP-BG provides power to a single
BroadGate platform, lower gauge cables can be used. See DC
Power Cables (page 2-10) for DC power cable requirements.
CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared
at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are
not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the
lugs.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-9

Maintenance Manual
To prepare a DC power cable:

1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead
jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 above for the black lead.
Installing the RAP-BG

The RAP-BG is attached to the rack side rails at the top position of the rack.
Attach the RAP-BG to the side rails and secure it with the four screws,
washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the RAP-BG:

1. The RAP-BG grounding stud is located on its rear cover, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-3: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements

described in Grounding Requirements (page 2-17).
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-BG grounding
stud, using a spring washer and nut.
4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack
grounding stud.
3-10
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-BG:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the
RAP-BG by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-4: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover and remove
the cover.
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board
by referring to the following figure (showing the terminals at source A side;
a similar board is used at source B side).
Figure 3-5: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG
CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to

identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-BG power terminal
board.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-11

Maintenance Manual
4. Bring the two leads of DC source A input power cable to the appropriate
RAP-BG opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on
the power terminal board (see the previous figure).
6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut
with a torque of 1450 N cm to 1600 N cm.
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
8. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.
9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using
cable ties.
During the following procedure, refer to the figures in Connecting DC power
cables to the RAP-BG (page 3-11).
To connect the DC power cables to a platform:
RAP-BG.
2. Insert the DC power cable end, terminated with lugs, of the BG-30 platform
through the opening for platform power cables connecting to source A. If
more platforms are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Platform 1
cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the platform power cable to the positive stud
terminal of Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of
Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
3-12
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual

7. Identify the platform's grounding terminals located on the inner side panel
of the RAP-BG as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-6: RAP-BG platform power cable grounding screws
8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the platform power cable to the
ground stud terminal located on the RAP-BG side panel.
9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.
10. If additional BG-30 platforms are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9
for each platform power cable.
11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the
platforms to source B.
12. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding platform position, and then securely attach the power cable
to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector
in accordance with its function.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-13

Maintenance Manual
To install the RAP-BG circuit breakers:

1. If the RAP-BG front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening it to the RAP-BG chassis and remove the cover.
Figure 3-7: RAP-BG front cover removal
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of Shelf 1

(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment; its rating is in accordance with the ordered platform
configuration).
Figure 3-8: RAP-BG circuit breaker installation
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
RAP-BG source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If more platforms are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert
the circuit breakers into the corresponding platform positions of the power
terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 for source B
circuit breakers.
3-14
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To check DC voltage polarity:

1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see
Grounding Requirements (page 2-17)).
2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-BG.
3. Set all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to ON.
4. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive
and negative contacts of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector
contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the BG-30 platform, as
seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 3-9: Platform DC input power connector pin functions
5. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -72 VDC),
and that it has the correct polarity.
6. Return all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to OFF.
7. Disconnect the RAP-BG input power sources.
8. Reinstall the RAP-BG front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.
Installing the RAP-4B

Before You Start:
Before connecting DC power cables, see DC Power Cables.
For a description of the RAP-4B, see 9200 series Reference Manual.
To install the RAP-4B:
1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the RAP-4B in the prescribed location.
3. Ground the RAP-4B to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-4B.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the BroadGate platforms to the RAP-4B.
6. Install circuit breakers.
7. Check power wiring.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-15

Maintenance Manual
Preparing DC Input Power Cables

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be

connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with
a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead must be
connected with a blue cable and the negative lead with a gray
cable. In the following sections use cables of the colors to
comply with the standards in your area of residence.
The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the
RAP-4B source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of
50 mm2 (0.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.
NOTE: When the RAP-4B provides power to a single
BroadGate platform, lower gauge cables may be used. See
DC Power Cables for DC power cable requirements.
CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared
at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are
not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the
lugs.
To prepare a DC power cable:

1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead
jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead.
3-16
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing the RAP-4B

The RAP-4B is attached to the rack side rails at the top of the rack.
To install the RAP-4B:
Attach the RAP-4B to the side rails and secure it with the four screws,
washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the RAP-4B:

NOTE: The RAP-4B is supplied, by default, with a grounding
cable connected to the rear of the unit. Use this cable to
connect ground to the RAP-4B.
1. The RAP-4B grounding studs are located on its rear cover as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-10: Locating RAP-4B grounding stud
If a grounding cable is already attached to the RAP-4B, skip Steps 2 and 3.

2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead (with a two-hole lug) as details
described in Grounding Requirements.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-17

Maintenance Manual
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-4B grounding
studs, using spring washers and nuts.
Figure 3-11: RAP-4B with grounding cable
4. Connect the two-hole lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the
rack's grounding bar.
To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-4B:
RAP-4B, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-12: Identifying RAP-4B cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover and remove
it.
3-18
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board,
as shown in the following figure (showing source A side; a similar board is
used at source B side).
Figure 3-13: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B
CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to

identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-4B power terminal
board.
4. Bring the two leads of one DC source A input power cable to the
appropriate RAP-4B opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using
cable ties.
During the following procedure, refer to the figure Connecting DC power
cables to the RAP-4B (page 3-19).
426006-2333-013-A05
3-19

Maintenance Manual
To connect the DC power cable to a platform:

RAP-4B.
2. Insert the DC power cable end terminated in lugs of the BG-30 platform
through the opening for power cables connecting to source A. If more
platforms are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Platform 1 cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the platform power cable to the positive stud
terminal of Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
4. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and M6 screw. Tighten
the M6 screw with a torque of 320 N cm to 350 N cm.
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of
Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
7. Identify the platforms grounding terminals located on the inner side panel
of the RAP-4B according to the following figure.
Figure 3-14: RAP-4B platform power cable grounding screws
8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the platform power cable to the
ground stud terminal located on the RAP-4B side panel.
9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.
10. If more BG-30 platforms are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for
each platform power cable.
11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the
platforms to source B.
12. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to its
corresponding platform, and then securely attach the power cable to the
rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
accordance with its function.
3-20
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To install the RAP-4B circuit breakers:

1. If the RAP-4B front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening it to the chassis and remove the cover.
Figure 3-15: RAP-4B front cover removal
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to power circuit A of Platform 1

(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment platform; its rating is in accordance with the ordered platform
configuration).
Figure 3-16: RAP-4B circuit breaker installation
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
RAP-4B source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If more platforms are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert
the circuit breakers into the corresponding platform positions of the power
terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source
B circuit breakers.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-21

Maintenance Manual
Checking DC Voltage Polarity

To check DC voltage polarity:
1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see
Grounding Requirements).
2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-4B.
3. Set all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to ON.
4. Use a DMM to test the voltage between the positive and negative contacts
of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector
contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the BG-30 platform, as
Figure 3-17: Platform DC input power connector pin functions
5. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -72 VDC),
and that it has the correct polarity.
6. Return all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to OFF.
7. Disconnect the RAP-4B input power sources.
8. Reinstall the RAP-4B front cover and fasten it with the two captive screws.
Installing the FST

Install the FST 50 mm below the fiber guide. If additional equipment is
installed below it, such as another BG-30 platform, an additional 50 mm must
be left free between the FST and such equipment.
To install the FST in the rack:
1. Attach the FST to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the
detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each platform. See the safety
information in Work and Equipment Safety (page 2-16) and Power Supply
Requirements.
3. Label the cables in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
3-22
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports
of the ETSI A rack, (or the rack sidewalls in an ETSI B rack).
5. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to release the latch, and pull
the FST towards you to open it.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it
fully so that you can thread the fibers.
6. Thread the fibers into the FST, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-18: Threading optical fibers in the FST
NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside

the FST and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.
8. Return the FST to the rack until it latches in place with a click.
CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are
closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with

the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap
until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding
connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a
cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm.
Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission
characteristics.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-23

Maintenance Manual
Installing the ODF

Identify the prescribed ODF locations in the rack before performing the
following procedures.
The ODF is supplied with two sets of rack mounting brackets: one for 19 and
ETSI racks (for both ETSI A and B), and the other for 23 7-foot bay racks.
To attach the rack mounting brackets to the ODF:
Refer to the following figure to identify the required set of rack mounting
brackets, and attach each bracket to the corresponding ODF side panel with
three screws.
Figure 3-19: Attaching rack mounting brackets to the ODF
3-24
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To connect optical fibers to the ODF:

1. Push the release button on the ODF front panel to the left to release the
latch and pull it towards you. The cover opens downwards.
Figure 3-20: ODF front panel
Figure 3-21: ODF open view
2. Hold the end of the swing-out tray and pull it out to gain access to the ODF
components.
3. Open the two cover thumb nuts and remove the protective cover from the
ODF splice support.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-25

Maintenance Manual
4. Insert the external fibers cable through the protective tube.
Figure 3-22: ODF fiber routes
5. Route the fiber ends through the cable guides to the splice support area.
6. Identify the adapter panel pigtail to be spliced to each user fiber.
7. Insert splicing sleeves over the pigtail, splice the user fiber to the pigtail,
and slide the splicing sleeve over the splice.
8. Place the splicing sleeve in one of the slots in the splice support.
NOTE: When more than 12 fibers are connected to the ODF,
start by first filling the slots of the lower splice support. After
those slots are occupied, reinstall the top splice support and
continue filling the support slots.
9. After splicing all the fibers, reinstall the protective cover removed in Step
3.
10. Push the swing-out tray back into the unit.
11. Close the ODF front cover by pushing it up until it clicks to the unit.
12. See the To attach the rack mounting brackets to the ODF procedure,
above, and secure the user fibers with cable ties to the fiber fastening
bracket at the rear of the ODF.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to fibers, do not tighten the
cable ties.
3-26
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To install ODF units in a rack:
Install each ODF in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack
side rails with four screws.
Installing the xDDF-21 Patch Panel

The BG-30 only supports balanced E1s directly. For unbalanced E1s, install the
xDDF-21 that provides balanced-to-unbalanced conversion for 21 E1s. The
number of xDDF-21 units to be installed with one BG-30B unit is based on the
number of PME1_21 modules (for the number of unbalanced E1s required).
To install an xDDF-21 patch panel:
1. Route the 100-pin SCSI cables leading from the E1 interfaces on the
PME1_21 panel along the side of the rack to the location where the
xDDF-21 patch panel is to be installed.
2. Before you install the patch panel, connect the SCSI cables leading to the
rear of the xDDF-21 patch panel. The cables are marked J1 and J2 and must
be connected to their respective connectors.
3. Attach the patch panel to the rack rails and secure using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
4. Connect the traffic cables to the front of the xDDF-21 patch panel, and
make a note of the appropriate channels on the identification label on the
inside of the panel door.
Installing the PIM2_63 Cable Guide and

Holder
The PIM2_63 cable guide and holder keeps the cable in the right position so
that it does not interfere with closing the rack's door. The cable guide must be
installed above the BG-30 platform.
To install the PIM2_63 cable guide and holder:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the PIM2_63 cable guide and holder in
the rack in accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the PIM2_63 cable guide and holder in the prescribed position and
fasten the unit to the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-27

Maintenance Manual
Installing the ICP_MCP30

To distribute the concentrated Auxiliary connector on the MCP30B panel into
dedicated connectors for each function, an MCP30B interconnection panel
(ICP) was developed. It is connected to the MCP30B module through a
back-to-back cable with 36-pin SCSI connectors on both sides. The
ICP_MCP30 can be installed anywhere in the rack.
To install an ICP_MCP30:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the ICP_MCP30 in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the ICP_MCP30 in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing
pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the platform to the rack
side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
Figure 3-23: Installing ICP_MCP30 in the rack
3-28
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing SM_10E ICPs

Three types of ICPs were developed to simplify installation and connection to
customer termination equipment. The ICP is connected to the SM_10E module
using a special cable that spreads the condensed cable to connector types
commonly used for each service. Each ICP can serve one SM_10E traffic
module. An ICP can be installed anywhere in the rack.
To install an SM_10E ICP:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the ICP in the rack in accordance with
the rack installation plan.
2. Place the ICP in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing pins to
hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the platform to the rack side
rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
Figure 3-24: Installing SM_10E ICPs in the rack
426006-2333-013-A05
3-29

Maintenance Manual
Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT

The AC_CONV_UNIT is an AC power platform that can be mounted
separately in the rack. The AC_CONV_UNIT is supplied with one set of
combined rack mounting brackets for 19 and ETSI racks (for both ETSI A and
B racks).
To install an AC_CONV_UNIT:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack in
2. Place the AC_CONV_UNIT in the prescribed position using the two
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the platform
to the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
Figure 3-25: Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack
3-30
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B Platform

in the Rack
Each BG-30B platform is supplied with two installed INF_30B or INF_30BH
modules, one installed FCU_30B or FCU_30BH module, and all other slots
empty (Tslots are covered by blank panels if they are to remain empty). The
installation activities covered in this section include:
Installing the Rail Stiffeners (page 3-31)
Installing the BG-30B Platform in the Rack (page 3-31)
Grounding the BG-30B Platform (page 3-33)
After these procedures, the BG-30B platform is ready for:
Installing the MCP30B Module (page 3-37)
Installing XIO30 Modules in the BG-30B (page 3-43)
Installing Tslot Modules in the BG-30B (page 3-44)
Installing an AC_CONV_MODULE in the AC_CONV_UNIT (page 3-45)
Installing SFP Modules (page 3-46)
Installing the Rail Stiffeners

If you install the, BG-30B in the rack without rail stiffeners, because of its
weight, the rear side of the platform is slightly lower than the front side. This
makes installation of the BG-30E very difficult. The rail stiffeners ensure that
the BG-30B is level after it is installed in the rack. Two rail stiffeners are
shipped along with the platform.
CAUTION: Rack stiffeners must be installed before installing
the BG-30E on the BG-30B.
To install the rail stiffeners:
1. Locate the two rail stiffeners included as part of the BG-30B platform
package.
2. Determine the position for the rail stiffener on the racks left side rail
according to the position of the BG-30B platform in the rack and in
3. Place the rail stiffener on the rear side of the racks left side rail.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-31

Maintenance Manual
4. Fasten the rail stiffener to the racks left side rail with two M6 screws and
washers through the uppermost and lowermost holes of the rail stiffener.
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to install the second rail stiffener on the racks right
side rail.
Figure 3-26: Installing rail stiffeners in the rack
Attaching the BG-30B Platform in the Rack

WARNING: Before starting, make sure the DC power is not
connected to the rack and that the circuit breakers in the RAP,
if used, are set to OFF.
Before you start:
Review the grounding requirements specified in Before You Start (page 2-1).
Obtain the required materials and make sure to perform the grounding
connections in accordance with these requirements.
3-32
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To attach a BG-30B platform to an ECI Telecom

recommended rack:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-30B platform in the rack in
2. Place the BG-30B platform in the prescribed position using the two
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the platform
to the rack side rails (to the second and third lowest screws in the rail
stiffeners) with four M6 screws and washers.
Grounding the BG-30B Platform

Before you start:
Review the grounding requirements specified in Preparing Cables and Fibers
(page 2-9). Obtain the required materials and make sure to perform the
grounding connections in accordance with these requirements.
To ground the BG-30B platform:
Connect the platform to the rack using rack mounting brackets. Grounding
is provided by contact of the unit with the rack.
Identifying Slots in the BG-30B

The BG-30B platform includes the following slots:
Two power supply module slots
One MCP30 slot
Two XIO30 card slots
One fan unit slot
Three traffic card slots (Tslots)
The following figure illustrates the slots arrangement.
Figure 3-27: BG-30B slots
The following table lists the modules that can be configured in each slot.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-33

Maintenance Manual
Table 3-2: BG-30B modules

Name
Applicable slots in BG-30B

DC
PSA
DC
PSB
INF_30B
INF_30BH
AC_CONV_30B
AC
PS
MS
XS A
XS B
TS 1#
TS 3#
FS
FCU_30B
FCU_30BH
MCP30
MCP30B
XIO30_1
XIO30_4
XIO30Q_1&4
XIO30_16
PME1_21
PME1_63
PM345_3
SMD1B
SMQ1
SMQ1&4
SMS4
SMD4
DMEoP_4
DMFE_4_L1
DMFX_4_L1
DMGE_1_L1
DMGE_4_L1
DMFE_4_L2
DMFX_4_L2
DMGE_2_L2
DMGE_4_L2
DMXE_22_L2
DMCES1_4
3-34
TS 2#
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
All cards support live insertion. Except for the INF_30B, INF_30BH,
FCU_30B, and FCU_30BH, all modules have the same dimensions. During
module installation, refer to BG-30B slots (page 3-33) and BG-30B modules to
ensure that you are inserting modules into their applicable slots. Modules are
designed so that they cannot be inserted into the wrong slot.
CAUTION: The mechanics in the platform and module panels
block the insertion of a module into an incorrect slot. When
inserting a module, if resistance is felt before the connectors
are flush, check whether it is inserted into the correct slot. Do
not exert excessive force to insert the module, as this may
damage the BG-30 platform and the module.
Installing a Power Module in the BG-30B

The BG-30B platform must have two DC power modules (INF_30B or
INF_30BH) or one AC power module (AC_CONV_30B) installed in the power
module slot, and is always shipped with power module already installed. The
following procedure therefore describes replacing the power module.
Figure 3-28: Installing a power module in the BG-30B
426006-2333-013-A05
3-35

Maintenance Manual
To install a power module in the BG-30B platform:

1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Hold the INF_30B or INF_30BH module extractor and insert the rear end
of the module into the card guides.
4. Push the module in until the panel at the front of the module is flush with
the front of the BG-30B platform. If resistance is felt before the connectors
are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
5. Secure the module in place by tightening its two captive screws.
Installing an FCU_30B or FCU_30BH in the

BG-30B
The BG-30B platform must have one Fan Control module (FCU_30B or
FCU_30BH) installed in the FCU slot, and is shipped with the module already
installed. The following procedure therefore describes replacing the module.
Figure 3-29: Installing an FCU_30B/ FCU_30BH module in the BG-30B
To install an FCU_30B/FCU_30BH module in the BG-30B

platform:
3. Hold the FCU_30B or FCU_30BH module extractor and insert the rear end
of the module into the card guides.
3-36
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing an MCP30B Module

The BG-30B platform is always delivered without the MCP30B installed. It
must therefore be installed in the field.
A pluggable CF card is installed inside the MCP30B/D, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-30: Location of the CF card inside the MCP30B/D
The MCP30B/D cannot work without a proper CF card. Use only CF cards
supplied by ECI Telecom. The MCP30B/D is always delivered without the CF
card, so it must be installed in the field. The installation of the MCP30B/D
includes the following steps:
Installing a CF card in the MCP30B/D
Installing the MCP30B/D in the BG-30B platform
426006-2333-013-A05
3-37

Maintenance Manual
To install a CF card in the MCP30B/D:
Figure 3-31: Installing a CF card into the MCP30B/D
1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Hold the CF card and insert the rear end of the card into the CF slot of the
MCP30B/D. The obtuse angle of the card must be placed towards the slot
near the panel side.
4. Push the CF card in until it clicks in place.
3-38
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To install an MCP30B/D module in the BG-30B platform:
Figure 3-32: Installing an MCP30B module in the BG-30B
3. Hold the MCP30B/D module extractor and insert the rear end of the power
module into the card guides of the MS slot.
5. Secure the module in place by tightening the two screws with a
screwdriver.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-39

Maintenance Manual
Installing an MCP30 Module

The BG-30B platform is always delivered without an MCP30 module installed.
It must therefore be installed in the field.
A pluggable SD card is installed inside the MCP30, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 3-33: Location of the SD card inside the MCP30
The MCP30 cannot work without a proper SD card. Use only SD cards
supplied by ECI Telecom. The MCP30 is always delivered without the SD
card, so it must be installed in the field. The installation of the MCP30 includes
the following steps:
3-40
Installing an SD card in the MCP30
Installing the MCP30 in the BG-30B platform
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To install an SD card in the MCP30:
Figure 3-34: Installing the SD card into the MCP30
2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Hold the SD card and insert the rear end of the card into the SD slot of the
MCP30. The obtuse angle of the card must be placed towards the slot near
the panel side.
4. Push the SD card in until it clicks in place.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-41

Maintenance Manual
To install an MCP30 module in the BG-30B platform:
Figure 3-35: Installing an MCP30 module in the BG-30B
3. Hold the MCP30 module extractor and insert the rear end of the power
module into the card guides of the MS slot.
screwdriver.
3-42
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing XIO30 Modules in the BG-30B

Each BG-30B platform must have two XIO30 modules installed. For a list of
available XIO30 modules and their technical descriptions, see the BroadGate
Product Line Reference Manual.
The BG-30B platform is always delivered without XIO30 modules, so they
must be installed in the field.
Figure 3-36: Installing an XIO30 module in the BG-30B
To install an XIO30 in the BG-30B platform:

3. Hold the XIO30 extractor and insert its rear end into the module guides of
one of the XS slots.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-43

Maintenance Manual
Installing Tslot Modules in the BG-30B

The BG-30B platform has three Tslots which are empty upon delivery (covered
by blank panels). The modules must therefore be installed in the field
according to the site installation plan.
For a list of available Tslot modules and their technical descriptions, see the
BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
NOTES:
The DMXE_22_L2 is not supported in slot TS1 of the

BG-30B.
Always install the DMXE_22_L2 on the left slots (near as
possible to the fan units).
Figure 3-37: Installing a Tslot module in the BG-30B
To install a Tslot module in the BG-30B platform:

1. Loosen the two screws of the Tslot blank panel and remove it.
2. Check that the Tslot module has not been physically damaged during
shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is
sealed.
3. Remove the Tslot module from its antistatic protection packaging and
perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any
problems.
4. Hold the Tslot module extractor and insert its rear end into the module
guides.
5. Push the module in until the front of the module is flush with the front of
the BG-30B platform. If resistance is felt, pull the module out and repeat
the procedure.
3-44
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing an AC_CONV_MODULE in the

AC_CONV_UNIT
The AC_CONV_UNIT has two slots for installing AC_CONV_MODULEs.
The AC_CONV_MODULE slots are empty upon delivery (covered by blank
panels) and the modules must therefore be installed in the field according to the
site installation plan.
Figure 3-38: Installing an AC_CONV_MODULE in the AC_CONV_UNIT
To install an AC_CONV_MODULE in the AC_CONV_UNIT:

1. Loosen the two screws of the AC_CONV_UNIT blank panel and remove
it.
2. Check that the AC_CONV_MODULE has not been physically damaged
during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original
packaging is sealed.
3. Remove the AC_CONV_MODULE from its antistatic protection
packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during
shipping. Report any problems.
4. Hold the AC_CONV_MODULE extractor and insert its rear end into the
module guides.
the AC_CONV_UNIT. If resistance is felt, pull the module out and repeat
the procedure.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-45

Maintenance Manual
Installing SFP Modules

All XIO30 modules are shipped without SFP modules. Relevant SFPs must be
installed in the field according to the field installation plan.
ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP transceivers in all optical
interfaces and electrical STM-1 interfaces. Hot swapping is allowed, provided
you observe safety precautions described in Before You Start (page 2-1).
NOTE: Only SFP modules supplied by ECI Telecom can be
used in the BG-30. Otherwise, the laser in the SFP module
will always shut down.
Figure 3-39: Installing an SFP/XFP module in the BG
To install an SFP module:

1. Check that the SFP has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
2. Remove the SFP from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Insert the rear end of the SFP module plug-in into the prescribed position,
and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place. If you feel resistance before the transceiver plug-in is
fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the insertion.
4. Lock the SFP module by closing the buckle (applicable if the module has a
locking mechanism).
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for other SFPs (if required).
3-46
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30E Platform

in the Rack
A very important differentiator of the BG-30 is that it consists of BG-30B and
BG-30E platforms, thus providing a better pay-as-you-grow solution. The
BG-30B covers a large number of applications. If you need more add-drop
capacity and additional functionality, such as Ethernet L2 and PCM, a BG-30E
can be added. The BG-30E supports live insertion and can be installed at any
time without affecting the traffic running on the BG-30B. The BG-30E can also
be installed when installing the BG-30B.
Each BG-30E platform is supplied with a power module slot and all extension
slots, initially empty. The three extension slots are covered by a cover panel.
The installation procedures described in this section include:
Installing the H Connector (page 3-48)
Installing the BG-30E Platform on the BG-30B Platform (page 3-49)
Attaching the BG-30E Platform in the Rack (page 3-52)
After these procedures have been completed, the BG-30E platform is ready for:
Installing Power Modules in the BG-30E (page 3-54)
Installing an FCU_30E in the BG-30E (page 3-55)
Installing Extension Cards in the BG-30E (page 3-56)
Installing SFP Modules in the ESW_2G_8F_E (page 3-59)
Installing Traffic Modules in the SM_10E (page 3-60)

WARNING: Before installing the BG-30E, make sure the DC
power cable is not connected to the BG-30E, and that the
circuit breakers in the RAP, if used, are set to OFF.
CAUTION: Before adding the BG-30E platform to the
BG-30B, ensure that the rail stiffeners have been installed. If
not, it is highly recommended that you first remove the
BG-30B from the rack and install the rail stiffeners before
proceeding with the installation. See Installing the Rail
Stiffeners (page 3-31).
426006-2333-013-A05
3-47

Maintenance Manual
Installing the H Connector

The H connector connects the BG-30B and BG-30E platforms.
Figure 3-40: Installing the H connector
To install the H connector:

1. Remove the cover plate by releasing the two screws.
2. Fasten the pilot pin into the screw hole by hand.
3. Insert the H connector assembly into the internal connectors, and then
fasten it on the cover by screwing in its two handles.
3-48
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30E Platform on the

BG-30B Platform
The BG-30E platform is mounted on top of the BG-30B platform using the
H connector.
Figure 3-41: Installing the BG-30E
To install the BG-30E platform on the BG-30B platform:

1. Fasten the two pilot pins for the BG-30E onto the cover by hand.
2. Mount the BG-30E on the BG-30B using the vertical pilot pins and holes at
the bottom of the BG-30E.
3. Ensure that the connectors for the H connector and the BG-30E are
perfectly matched.
4. Insert the six snap rivets into the holes on the bottom of the BG-30E.
5. Verify that the caps of the rivets are flat on the bottom of the BG-30E.
6. Fasten the four fastener screws (SST PH M6 x 16) to the mounting flange
of the BG-30E.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-49

Maintenance Manual
Disassembling the BG-30E from the BG-30B

The following is the correct way to disassemble the BG-30E from the BG-30B
platform. The BG-30E is attached to the BG-30B with six snap rivets; you must
first remove these rivets before removing the BG-30E. It is recommended to
use a thin flat tool (like a screwdriver) to raise the rivet caps first, and then
remove them.
Figure 3-42: Removing the BG-30E from the BG-30B
3-50
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To disassemble the BG-30E from the BG-30B:

1. Insert a thin flat-head screwdriver under the rivet cap.
Figure 3-43: Inserting the thin flat-head tool
2. Raise the rivet cap by the screwdriver.
Figure 3-44: Raising the rivet cap
3. Remove the rivet with your hand.
Figure 3-45: Removing the rivet
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to remove the other rivets.

5. Raise the BG-30E from the BG-30B and remove it.
6. Disassemble the pin guides and the H-connector from the BG-30B.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-51

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the BG-30E Platform in the Rack

The BG-30E platform can be mounted on the rack after it has been assembled
with the BG-30B or added to a BG-30B platform already mounted in the rack.
To attach a BG-30E platform to an ECI Telecom
recommended rack:
Fasten the BG-30E platform to the rack side rails with four M6 screws,
washers, and nuts. BG-30E platform grounding is achieved by contact
when connecting the platform to the rack using rack mounting brackets.
Identifying Slots in the BG-30E

The layout of the BG-30E is shown in the following figures.
Figure 3-46: BG-30E regular slots layout
Figure 3-47: BG-30E slots layout with ES 3# extended
The figures show two possible arrangements for the BG-30E. The upper is the
regular layout;. the lower is very similar but with an extension arrangement for
the uppermost slot (ES 3#).
The BG-30E platform consists of the following slots:
3-52
Two slots (PS A and PS B) for installing two DC power supply modules
One slot (FS) for installing a fan module
Three slots (ES 1#, ES 2#, ES 3#) for accommodating expansion traffic
card (Eslots)
Slot ES 3# (can be extended) for housing a long card (TP63_1)
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
The following table lists the modules supported in V14 that can be configured
in each slot.
Table 3-3: BG-30E modules
Name
INF_30E
Applicable slots in BG-30E

PS A
PS B
AC PS ES
1#
ES
2#
ES
3#
ES 3#
Extended
FCU_30E
AC_CONV_30E
SM_10E
PE1_63
P345_3E
S1_4
S4_1
OBC
ESW_2G_8F_E
MPS_2G_8F
DMCE1_32
MPoE_12G
TP21_2
TPS1_1
TPEH8_1
TP63_1
TPEH8_1
426006-2333-013-A05
FS
3-53

Maintenance Manual
Installing Power Modules in the BG-30E

The BG-30E platform must have power modules installed in the power module
slot, either two INF_30Es (DC power supply) or one AC_CONV_30E (AC
power supply) can be configured according to the site installation plan. The
BG-30E platform is always shipped with the power module slot empty.
Figure 3-48: Installing a power module in the BG-30E
To install a power module in the BG-30E:

3. Insert the rear end of the power module into the card guides.
the front of the BG-30E platform. If resistance is felt before the connectors
screwdriver.
3-54
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing an FCU_30E in the BG-30E

The BG-30E platform must have one Fan Control module (FCU_30E) installed
in the FCU slot. The BG-30E is always shipped with an FCU_30E module
installed. The procedure in this section therefore describes replacing the
module.
Figure 3-49: Installing an FCU_30E in the BG-30E
To install an FCU_30E in the BG-30E:

3. Hold the FCU_30E module extractor and insert the rear end of the power
module into the card guides.
the front of the BG-30E platform. If resistance is felt before the connectors
screwdriver.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-55

Maintenance Manual
Installing Extension Cards in the BG-30E

Extension cards are installed in Eslots according to the site installation plan.
For a list of available extension cards and their technical descriptions, see the
Figure 3-50: Installing an extension card in the BG-30E
CAUTION: When installing a MPoE_12G card the total PoE

power budget is up to 50 W.
To install an extension card in the BG-30E:

1. Identify the Eslot in which you want to install the extension card according
to the site installation plan.
2. Loosen the two screws on the Eslot cover and remove it.
3. Check that the extension card has not been physically damaged during
sealed.
4. Remove the extension card from its antistatic protection packaging and
problems.
5. Hold the extension card handles and insert its rear end into the card guides.
6. Push the card in until the front of the card is flush with the front of the
BG-30E platform. If resistance is felt, pull the card out and repeat the
procedure.
7. Secure the card in place by fastening its two captive screws.
3-56
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: Extension cards support live insertion. They can be

installed at any time without affecting the existing traffic
running on the BG-30B or BG-30E.
Installing Long Cards in the BG-30E

Long cards (like TP636_1 or TPEH8_1) require the expanded ES 3 # slot for
their installation. For a list of available IOP cards and their technical
descriptions, see the BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
Before you start
Before installing a long card, remove the blank panel, covering the additional
expansion space to the left of slot ES 3# and the card guide at the left side of
the slot.
To prepare the extension of the ES 3# slot:
1. Open the two screws fastening the blank panel to the left of slot ES 3#, and
remove it.
Figure 3-51: Removing the blank panel
426006-2333-013-A05
3-57

Maintenance Manual
2. Open the FH M1.6 screw fastening the card guide in the left side of ES 3#,
and remove it.
Figure 3-52: Removing the card guide
WARNING: Prevent the card guide touching other cards,

while the system is operating.
To install a long card in the BG-30E:
1. Identify the ES 3# slot in which to install the long card according to the site
installation plan (must be ES 3#).
3. Remove the long card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform
a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3-58
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
4. Hold the card handles and insert its rear end into the card guides.
Figure 3-53: Installing a long card in the BG-30E
BG-30E platform. If resistance is felt, pull the card out and repeat the
procedure.
6. Fasten the three captive screws on the card panel and secure it in place.
NOTE: Long cards support live insertion. They can be

running on the BG-30E.
Installing SFP Modules in the ESW_2G_8F_E

All ESW_2G_8F_E cards are shipped without SFP modules installed for GbE
interfaces. If a GbE interface is needed, the proper SFP module must be
installed in the field according to the field installation plan.
ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP transceivers for GbE interfaces.
Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe the safety precautions
described in Before You Start (page 2-1) during the replacement.
NOTE: Only GbE SFP modules supplied by ECI Telecom
can be used in the ESW_2G_8F_E. Otherwise, the laser in the

SFP module shuts down.
To install an SFP transceiver in the ESW_2G_8F_E:
Follow the same procedure described in Installing SFP Modules (page 346) to install an SFP transceiver in the ESW_2G_8F_E.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-59

Maintenance Manual
Installing Traffic Modules in the SM_10E

The SM_10E consists of a base card and up to three traffic modules. For a list
of available traffic modules and their technical descriptions, see the BroadGate
The SM_10E card is supplied without a traffic module installed; the
corresponding slots are covered by blank panels.
Figure 3-54: Installing a traffic module on the SM_10E
To install a traffic module in the SM_10E card:

1. Loosen the two screws fastening the blank panel to the SM_10E front, and
remove it.
2. Check that the traffic module has not been physically damaged during
sealed.
3. Remove the traffic module from its antistatic protection packaging and
problems.
4. Hold the traffic module handle and insert its rear end into the traffic module
slot guides.
the SM_10E. If resistance is felt, pull the module out and repeat the
procedure.
6. Fasten the module in place with its two captive screws.
NOTE: SM_10E modules support live insertion. They can be
installed at any time without affecting existing traffic running
on the platform, including the SM_10E.
3-60
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing the EXT-2U Platform

in the Rack
EXT-2U is a expansion unit which can be added on top of the BG-30B to
provide enhanced capacity and a rich feature list. If you need more add-drop
capacity and additional functionality, such as Ethernet L2 and PCM, a EXT-2U
can be added. The EXT-2U supports live insertion and can be installed at any
time without affecting the traffic running on the BG-30B. The EXT-2U can
also be installed when installing the BG-30B.
It includes its own independent power supply and fan unit, for additional
reliability and security. The three multipurpose slots of the EXT-2U support
any combination of extractable traffic cards. TDM, ADM, Ethernet, CES, and
EoPDH traffic are all handled through cards in these traffic slots, with all
interfaces through convenient SFP modules.
Each EXT-2U platform is supplied with a power module slot and all extension
slots, initially empty. The three extension slots are covered by a cover panel.
Installing the EXT-2U Shelf on the BG-30B

Shelf
The EXT-2U platform is mounted on top of the BG-30B platform using the
H connector.
You need a EXT-2U installation kit to install the EXT-2U on the BG-30B. This
is shipped as part of the EXT-2U platform package. The kit includes the
EXT-2U TO BG30B/BG-64/BG9310 CONNECTION SPEC. (DWG NO.
3HETC6-3468-068) drawing, which describes the installation process in detail.
Be sure to follow this drawing closely during EXT-2U installation. The
following procedure is a high level summary of the installation process.
WARNING: Before starting to install the EXT-2U, make sure
the DC power cable is not connected to the EXT-2U, and that
the circuit breakers in the RAP, if used, are set to OFF.
CAUTION: Before adding the EXT-2U to the BG-30-B,
ensure that the rail stiffeners have been installed. (It is very
difficult to install the EXT-2U without them.) If not, it is
highly recommended that you first remove the BG-30B from
the rack and install the rail stiffeners before proceeding with
the EXT-2U installation. See Installing the Rail Stiffeners
(page 3-31).
426006-2333-013-A05
3-61

Maintenance Manual
WARNING: Take great care when installing the EXT-2U in
order to avoid damage to the BG-30-B or EXT-2U. Be sure to

follow the drawing provided in the EXT-2U installation kit.
To install the EXT-2U platform on the BG-30B platform:

1. Fasten the two pilot pins for the EXT-2U onto the cover by hand.
2. Mount the EXT-2U on the BG-30B using the vertical pilot pins and holes
at the bottom of the EXT-2U.
3. Ensure that the connectors for the H connector and the EXT-2U are
completely matched.
4. Insert the six snap rivets into the holes on the bottom of the EXT-2U.
5. Verify that the caps of the rivets are flat on the bottom of the EXT-2U.
6. Fasten the four fastener screws (SST PH M6 x 16) to the mounting flange
of the EXT-2U.
Installing the H Connector

The H connector connects the BG-30B and EXT-2U platforms.
Figure 3-55: Installing the H connector in the BG-30
To install the H connector:

1. Remove the H connector cover (on top of the BG-30) by opening its two
screws.
2. Fasten the pilot pin into the screw hole by hand.
3. Insert the H connector assembly into the internal connectors, and then
fasten it on the cover by screwing in its two handles.
3-62
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Disassembling the EXT-2U from the BG-30B

The following is the correct way to disassemble the EXT-2U from the BG-30B.
The EXT-2U is attached to the BG-30B with six snap rivets. You must first
remove these rivets before removing the EXT-2U. It is recommended to use a
thin flat tool (like a screwdriver) to raise the rivet caps first, and then remove
them.
NOTE: The following figure shows the disassembling of the
BG-30E from the BG-30B, the removal of the EXT-2U from
the BG-30 is similar.
Figure 3-56: Removing the BG-30E from the BG-30B
426006-2333-013-A05
3-63

Maintenance Manual
To disassemble the EXT-2U from the BG-30B:

1. Insert a thin flat-head screwdriver under the rivet cap.
Figure 3-57: Inserting the thin flat-head tool
2. Raise the rivet cap by the screwdriver.
Figure 3-58: Raising the rivet cap
3. Remove the rivet with your hand.
Figure 3-59: Removing the rivet
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to remove the other rivets.

5. Raise the EXT-2U from the BG-30B and remove it.
6. Disassemble the pin guides and the H-connector from the BG-30B.
3-64
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the EXT-2U Shelf to the Rack

The EXT-2U platform can be mounted in the rack after it has been assembled
with the BG-30B or added to a BG-30B platform already mounted in the rack.
To attach a EXT-2U platform to an ECI Telecom
recommended rack:
Fasten the EXT-2U platform to the rack side rails with four M6 screws,
washers, and nuts. EXT-2U platform grounding is achieved by contact
when connecting the platform to the rack using rack mounting brackets.
Identifying Slots in the EXT-2U

The layout of the EXT-2U is depicted in the following figures.
Figure 3-60: EXT-2U regular slots layout
The figures show two possible arrangements for the EXT-2U slots layout. The
upper figure shows the regular layout of the EXT-2U. The lower figure is very
similar to the first, with an extension arrangement for the uppermost slot (ES
3#).
The EXT-2U platform consists of the following slots:
Two slots (PS A and PS B) for installing two DC power supply modules or
one AC power supply module
One slot (FS) for installing a fan module
Three slots (ES 1#, ES 2#, ES 3#) for accommodating expansion traffic
card (Eslots)
Slot ES 3# (can be extended) for housing a long card (TP63_1)
426006-2333-013-A05
3-65

Maintenance Manual
The following table lists the modules supported in V14 that can be configured
in each slot in the EXT-2U.
Table 3-4: EXT-2U modules
Name
INF_E2U
Applicable slots in EXT-2U

PS A
PS B
AC PS ES 1#
ES 2#
ES 3#
ES 3#
Extended
FCU_E2U
3-66
FS
SM_10E
PE1_63
P345_3E
S1_4
S4_1
OBC
ESW_2G_8F_E
MPS_2G_8F
DMCE1_32
TP21_2
TPS1_1
TP63_1
TPEH8_1
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing a Power Module in the EXT-2U

The EXT-2U platform must have power modules installed in the power module
slot. Two INF_E2Us can be configured according to the site installation plan.
The EXT-2U platform is always shipped with the power module slot empty.
Figure 3-61: Installing a power module in the EXT-2U
To install a power module in the EXT-2U:

3. Insert the rear end of the power module into the card guides.
the front of the EXT-2U platform. If resistance is felt before the connectors
screwdriver.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-67

Maintenance Manual
Installing an FCU_E2U in the EXT-2U

The EXT-2U platform must have one Fan Control module (FCU_E2U)
installed in the FCU slot, and is shipped with the module already installed. The
following procedure therefore describes replacing the module.
Figure 3-62: Installing an FCU_E2U in the EXT-2U
This procedure is also applicable for replacing an operating FCU_E2U. To

perform the replacement in the shortest time, prepare the replacement
FCU_E2U in advance by taking it out of its package and placing it near the
operating unit.
CAUTION: To avoid traffic hit in an operating system, don't
turn it off while replacing an FCU_E2U. The system can
operate without a fan unit for up to 4 minutes. Perform the
replacement in this time.
To install an FCU_E2U in the EXT-2U:

3. Hold the FCU_E2U module extractor and insert the rear end of the power
module into the card guides.
the front of the EXT-2U platform. If resistance is felt before the connectors
screwdriver.
3-68
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing Extension Cards in the EXT-2U

The EXT-2U is shipped with its Eslots covered by blank panels. Remove the
corresponding cover to install an extension card. Extension cards are installed
according to the site installation plan
For a list of available extension cards and their technical descriptions, see the
The EXT-2U is shipped with its Eslots covered by blank panels. You should
remove the corresponding cover to install an extension card.
Figure 3-63: Installing an extension card in the EXT-2U
CAUTION: When installing a MPoE_12G card the total PoE

power budget is up to 90 W.
To install an extension card in the EXT-2U platform:

1. Identify the Eslot in which you want to install the extension card, according
to the site installation plan.
2. Loosen the two screws on the Eslot cover and remove it.
3. Check that the extension card has not been physically damaged during
sealed.
4. Remove the extension card from its antistatic protection packaging and
problems.
5. Hold the extension card handles and insert its rear end into the card guides.
6. Push the extension card in until the front of the card is flush with the front
of the EXT-2U platform. If resistance is felt, pull the card out and repeat
the procedure.
7. Secure the card in place by fastening its two captive screws.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-69

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: Extension cards support live insertion. They can be

running on the BG-30B or EXT-2U.
Installing Long Cards in the EXT-2U

Long cards (TP636_1 or TPEH8_1) require the expanded ES 3 # slot for their
installation. For a list of available IOP cards and their technical descriptions,
see the BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
Before you start
Before installing a long card, remove the blank panel, covering the additional
expansion space to the left of slot ES 3# and the card guide at the left side of
the slot.
To prepare the extension of the ES 3# slot:
1. Open the two screws fastening the blank panel to the left of slot ES 3#, and
remove it.
Figure 3-64: Removing the blank panel
3-70
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
2. Open the FH M1.6 screw fastening the card guide in the left side of ES 3#,
and remove it.
Figure 3-65: Removing the card guide
WARNING: Prevent the card guide touching other cards,

while the system is operating.
To install a long card in the EXT-2U:
1. Identify the ES 3# slot in which you want to install the long card according
to the site installation plan (must be ES 3#).
3. Remove the long card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform
a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
4. Hold the card handles and insert its rear end into the card guides.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-71

Maintenance Manual
EXT-2U platform. If resistance is felt, pull the card out and repeat the
procedure.
6. Fasten the three captive screws on the card panel and secure it in place.
Figure 3-66: Installing a long card in the BG-30E
NOTE: Long cards support live insertion. They can be

running on the EXT-2U.
3-72
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Fibers and Cables to

the BG-30 Shelf
In general, all electrical traffic cables, power cables, alarm cables, and data
cables must be routed along the sides of the rack. All optical fibers must be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the rack.
Electrical traffic and other cables (DC, alarm, management, timing, and so on)
must be routed along the side of the rack, and held in place with cable ties.
Connecting Power and Alarm Cables to a DC

Power Source
To connect power and alarm cables:
1. Route the power cables leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to
the appropriate BG-30B platform.
NOTE: For further details about the RAP installation
procedure, see Installing the RAP-BG (page 3-9) or Installing
the RAP-4B (page 3-15).
2. Connect the end of the DC power cable from one source, terminating with a
3-pin D-type female connector in accordance with the rack installation plan
and the cable tags, to the DC power connector on one INF_30B or
INF_30BH.
3. Connect the end of the DC power cable from the second source,
terminating with a 3-pin D-type female connector in accordance with the
rack installation plan and the cable tags, to the DC power connector on the
second INF_30B or INF_30BH.
4. Route the alarm cable leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to
the appropriate BG-30B platform (if an ICP_MCP30 is not installed) or to
the appropriate ICP_MCP30, if installed.
5. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable, in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags, to the Auxiliary connector on the
MCP30B (if an ICP_MCP30 is not installed) or the Alarms connector on
the front panel of the ICP_MCP30, if installed.
6. Secure the cable connector to the MCP30B or ICP_MCP30 connector with
the cable connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot
reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
screwdriver (maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N
cm to 44 N cm.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-73

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules

Before installing the BG-30 platform and modules, all optical fibers must be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the ECI
Telecom recommended rack into the FST under the BG-30 platform being
installed, and threaded into the FST. For more information, see Installing the
Fiber Storage Tray (page 3-22).
All optical fibers in the BG-30 platform are connected to the LC connectors on
the optical SFP transceivers in the front panel of the XIO30 modules.

characteristics.
To connect an optical fiber to an SFP module:

1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch and pull the
FST out towards you.
2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the
tray.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. If you cannot release the
fiber in the halfway position, pull the tray again to open it
fully.
3. Thread the end of the fiber through the rack slots to the optical transceiver
LC connector on the designated module. Leave some slack to prevent
stress.
4. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers using an approved
cleaning kit.
5. Remove the cover from the optical transceiver. Connect the fiber connector
to the LC connector on the optical transceiver.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for all optical modules in the BG-30 platform.
7. When you have completed the connection of all optical modules, gently
push the FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.
3-74
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface

Cables to the BG-30
Information in this section supplements that regarding the connection of power,
alarm, and grounding cables described in previous sections.
Connect the cables to the equipment connectors according to the information
appearing in the relevant cabling diagrams or tables. To identify the physical
location of connectors, see the equipment panel figures in the BroadGate
Routing and Connecting E1 Cables for

Balanced E1 Interfaces
E1 cables are used for connecting the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces on the
PME1_21 panel. Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs (transmit
and receive) supporting 21 E1s. The cable end connecting to the PME1_21
module is terminated with a 100-pin SCSI male connector.
To connect E1 cables to the PME1_21:
1. Arrange the E1 traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each E1 cable down to the level of the BG-30 platform.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening near the platform until the cable connector
is positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to
fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the PME1_21 module with
the appropriate DDF connections.
5. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding connectors on the
PME1_21 front panel.
6. Secure the cable connector to the PME1_21 connector with the cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot reach the
screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to
secure the cable connector as this may damage the PME1_21.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-75

Maintenance Manual

Unbalanced E1 Interfaces
The PME1_21 can only provide balanced E1s directly. For unbalanced E1s, the
xDDF-21 patch panels must be installed with the BG-30. Each xDDF-21
provides balanced-to-unbalanced conversion for 21 E1s.
The cable between the PME1_21 and the xDDF-21 (supplied by ECI Telecom)
consists of 21 E1 twisted pairs (transmit and receive) supporting 21 balanced
E1s. The cable end connecting to the PME1_21 is terminated with a 100-pin
SCSI male connector. The cable end connecting to the xDDF-21 is terminated
with two 50-pin SCSI male connectors.
To connect E1 cables between the BG-30 and the xDDF-21:
1. Arrange the E1 traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull the 100-pin SCSI end of the cable down to the level of the BG-30
platform.
4. Connect the cable connector to the E1 connectors on the front panel of the
PME1_21 module.
5. Secure the cable connector to the PME1_21 connectors with two cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot reach the
screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
6. Pull the 2 x 50-pin SCSI end of the cable to the level of the xDDF-21.
7. Bend the cables and thread them through the side cable guides of the rack
and through the appropriate opening near the platform until the cable
connector is positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as
required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
8. Connect the cable connector marked J1 to the 50-pin SCSI connector on the
xDDF-21 panel marked J1. Connect the cable connector marked J2 to the
50-pin SCSI connector on the xDDF-21 panel marked J2.
9. Secure the cable connectors to the xDDF-21 connectors with two cable
connector screws for each connector. Tighten the screws manually. If you
cannot reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
cm to 44 N cm.
secure the cable connector, as this may damage the
PME1_21.
3-76
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To connect E1 cables between the xDDF-21 and the external

DDF:
Coaxial cables are used for connecting unbalanced E1s between the
xDDF-21 and the external DDF. A pair of coaxial cables is used for each
E1 and can be prepared on site. The cable end connecting to the xDDF-21
is terminated with a DIN 1.0/2.3 connector. The connector on the other end
of the cable depends on the connector used in the external DDF. For the
connection of coaxial cables, see Routing and Connecting Coaxial Cables
(page 3-80).
Traffic Cable for PME1_63

The PME1_63 has a special 272-pin VHDCI female connector for connecting
to its 63 x E1 interfaces. A special cable offered by ECI Telecom is used to
make the connection.
The cable is constructed of three main parts:
Double 136-pin VHDCI male connector with three pairs of 30AWG cable
tails
Conversion cable-size box
Three pairs of 26 AWG cables
426006-2333-013-A05
3-77

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-67: PME1_63 traffic cable
The three 30 AWG cable pairs connect on one side to the double 136-pin
VHDCI connector and on the other side to the conversion box. The conversion
box connects the three 30 AWG cable pairs and three pairs of 26 AWG cables,
making the wire-size conversion. The 26AWG cables are connected at the
other end to the customer's DDF. Each cable in a pair is bonded to the other,
shaping a figure-eight pattern.
Each pair of the 26AWG cables carries 21 E1s, totaling 63 E1s. To facilitate
identification of the E1 groups, each cable pair is marked with color strips
along its jacket according to the following key:
3-78
First pair, E1s Nos. 1 to 21 - red strips
Second pair, E1s Nos. 22 to 42 - blue strips
Third pair, E1s Nos. 43 to 63 - yellow strips
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting E1 Cables to the

PME1_63
The PME1_63 has a 272-pin VHDCI female connector for connecting to its 63
x E1 interfaces. A special cable offered by ECI Telecom is used to make the
connection, see Traffic Cable for PME1_63 (page 3-77). The connector on the
cable has a pin guide that must be inserted into the corresponding hole, to the
lower left side of PME1_63 connector.
A cable guide and holder installed above the BG platform helps route the
special PME1_63 cables neatly. This unit makes it possible keep the cable path
the short route between the module on the platform and the conversion box (on
the cable).
To connect the PME1_63 traffic cable:
1. Identify the pin guide on the traffic cable connector and the corresponding
hole on the PME1_63 and insert it.
2. Gently push the cable connector into the corresponding PME1_63
connector. If resistance is felt before the connectors mate, pull the
connector out and repeat the procedure.
3. Secure the connector in place by tightening its four captive screws.
Figure 3-68: PME1_63 traffic cable installation
426006-2333-013-A05
3-79

Maintenance Manual
To route the PME1_63 traffic cable:

1. Bend the cables from the connector installed in the previous procedure
towards the cable guide and holder unit (see the preceding figure).
2. Insert a Velcro strip into the corresponding holes in the cable guide, route
the cables through the strip and tighten the strip on the cables.
3. Place the cable conversion box on the BG platform.
4. Route the 26AWG cables coming from the conversion box to the rack side
rails and tighten them to the rails with cable ties.
5. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the PME1_63 with the
appropriate DDF connections.
Routing and Connecting Coaxial Cables

Individual coaxial cables are used for connecting the interfaces located on the
electrical STM-1 SFPs on the XIO30_1 and the xDDF-21.
As part of the site preparations, suitable cables must be routed from the
relevant DDF (if used) to the intended rack location and connected to DIN
1.0/2.3 connectors. Cable length must be sufficient to routine the cables to the
appropriate level in the rack.
To connect individual coaxial traffic cables to the BG-30 or
xDDF-21:
1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in groups
according to the designated electrical interfaces and route them along the
guides at the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-30 or xDDF-21 unit.
2. Cut excess cable length, if necessary.
3. Connect the BG-30 or xDDF-21 end of the cables to DIN 1.0/2.3
connectors and the other end to the relevant coaxial cable connector,
crimping the cable as required.
4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack so
that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the appropriate adapter.
Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
5. Connect the connector on the cable to the corresponding electrical
connector on the BG-30 or xDDF-21.
6. Connect the connector on the other end of cable to the corresponding
electrical connector on the external DDF.
3-80
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connecting I/O Protection Cables in the

BG-30
Up to two traffic slots in the BG-30E can be configured with protection cards
to add I/O protection capabilities to the platform.
The protection card is connected to both operating and protection I/O modules
in the BG-30B or BG-30E platform.
If a failure is detected in one of the operating I/O modules, the MCP30
switches the traffic to the protection module.
The protection card is connected to the main and protection I/O modules by
traffic cables, and the client's traffic is connected directly to the protection card.
Protection cards support the electrical PDH and SDH modules with the
following protection schemes:
1:1 protection scheme - one protection module/card is connected to a single

I/O module/card
1:2 protection scheme - one protection module/card is connected to one or

two I/O modules/cards
The BG-30E connects to a connector on top of the BG-30B platform that

provides the power and control buses required for the protection card operation.
The available protection cards are:
TP21_2
TP63_1
TPS1_1
The following table summarizes the available Tributary Protection cards (TP)s,
the type of I/O modules they protect, the traffic rate, and the protection scheme.
Table 3-5: Protection and protected cards summary
Protection card type
Protected I/O
module/card
Traffic rate
Protection scheme
TP21_2
PME1_21
2 Mbps
1:2
TP63_1
PE1_63/3 x
PME1_21
2 Mbps
1:1
TPS1_1
PM345_3,
P345_3E,
XIO30-1/4,
XIO30Q_1&4,
SMQ1&4
34/45 Mbps,
155 Mbps
1:1
426006-2333-013-A05
3-81

Maintenance Manual
Protection Jumper Cables for I/O Cards

ECI Telecom has defined a set of protection jumper cables to be used with the
various BG-30 protection cards. They include:
L114 - for TP21_1 operating in 1:2, or 1:1 protection schemes (one

PME1_21 protecting two PME1_21, or one PME1_21 protecting one
PME1_21).
L123 - for TP63_1 cards operating in 1:1 protection scheme with PE1_63
cards (one PE1_63 protecting one PE1_63).
L128 - for TP63_1 cards operating in 1:1 protection scheme with three
PME1_21 modules and one PE1_63 card (one PE1_63 protecting three
PME1_21 modules).
L127 - for TPS1_1 cards operating in 1:1 protection scheme with different
STM-1 or DS-3/E3 cards/modules (one SMQ1&4, or XIO30Q_1&4, or
PM345_3, or P345_3E card/module protecting one card/module of the
same type).
The following sections detail the structure and usage of each cable.
Protection Jumper Cable for TP21_2 (L114)

The L114 protection jumper cable is used to connect the TP21_2 to PME1_21
in 1:2 or 1:1 protection schemes.
The jumper cable has a dual VHDCI 68-pin male connector on one end and a
SCSI 100-pin male connector on the other.
Figure 3-69: L114 protection jumper cable schematic diagram
Use the cable as follows:
3-82
3 x L114 cables for 1:2 protection with the TP21_2 card (one PME1_21
(standby) module protects two PME1_21 (operating) modules).
2 x L114 cables for 1:1 protection with the TP21_2 card (one PME1_21
(standby) module protects one PME1_21 (operating) module).
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Protection Jumper Cables for TP63_1 (L123

and L128)
The L123 protection jumper cable is used to connect the TP63_1 to the PE1_63
in 1:1 protection scheme.
The jumper cable has 2 x dual VHDCI 68-pin male connectors on one end, and
3 x dual VHDCI 68-pin male connectors on the other.
The L128 protection jumper cable is used to connect the TP63_1 to 3 x

PME1_21 modules in 1:1 protection scheme. An L123 jumper cable is used to
connect the TP63_1 to a PE1_63 (standby) card in this configuration.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-83

Maintenance Manual
The L128 protection jumper cable has 2 x dual VHDCI 68-pin male connectors
on one end and 3 x SCSI 100-pin male connectors on the other.
Use the cables as follows:
3-84
2 x L123 cables for 1:1 protection with the TP63_1 card for PE1_63
protection (one PE1_63 (standby) card protects one PE1_63 (operating)
card).
1 x L128 cable and 1 x L123 cable with the TP63_1 card for PME1_21
protection (one PE1_63 (standby) card protects three PME1_21 (operating)
modules).
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Protection Jumper Cable for TPS1_1 (L127)

The L127 protection jumper cable is used to connect the TPS1_1 to various
STM-1 or DS-3/E3 traffic cards/modules in 1:1 protection schemes.
The jumper cable has a DSUB 8W8 connector on one end and 8 x DIN 1.0/2.3
connectors on the other.
Use the cable as follows:
2 x L127 cables for 1:1 protection with the TPS1_1 card (one STM-1 or
DS-3/E3 (standby) card/module protects one STM-1 or DS-3/E3
(operating) card/module of the same type).
426006-2333-013-A05
3-85

Maintenance Manual
Protection Jumper Cables Usage

The following table summarizes the usage of jumper cables for I/O protection
in the BG-30.
Table 3-6: Protection jumper cables usage
3-86
TP card (protection
scheme)
I/O card/module
(qty)
Jumper cable
(qty)
End connectors
TP21_2 (1:2)
PME1_21 (3)
L114 (3)
VHDCI68(dual port) to
SCSI 100
TP21_2 (1:1)
PME1_21 (2)
L114 (2)
VHDCI68(dual port) to
SCSI 100
TP63_1 (1:1)
PE1_63 (2)
L123 (2)
2 x VHDCI68 (dual port)

to 3 x VHDCI68 (dual
port)
TP63_1 (1:1)
PE1_63 (1)
PME1_21 (3)
L123 (1)
L128 (1)
2 x VHDCI68 (dual port)

to 3 x VHDCI68 (dual
port)
VHDCI68 (dual port) to 3
x SCSI 100
TPS1_1 (1:1)
SMQ1&4 (2)
L127 (2)
DSUB 8W8 to 8 x DIN

1.0/2.3
TPS1_1 (1:1)
XIO30Q_1&4 (2) L127 (2)
DSUB 8W8 to 8 x DIN

1.0/2.3
TPS1_1 (1:1)
PM345_3 (2)
L127 (2)
DSUB 8W8 to 8 x DIN

1.0/2.3
TPS1_1 (1:1)
P345_3E (2)
L127 (2)
DSUB 8W8 to 8 x DIN

1.0/2.3
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connecting the TP21_2

The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:2 protection scheme for a
BG-30 populated with PME1_21 modules in the TS1, TS2, and TS3 slots of
the BG-30B and a TP21_2 card in the ETS1 slot of the BG-30E. The TS3 slot
in the BG-30B designates the protection module, and TS1 and TS2 slots the
main (working) modules.
Figure 3-73: TP21_2 1:2 protection scheme example
BG-30 populated with PME1_21 modules in TS2 and TS3 slots of the BG-30B
and a TP21_2 card in the ETS1 slot of the BG-30E. The TS3 slot in the
BG-30B designates the protection module, and the TS2 slot the main (working)
module.
Figure 3-74: TP21_2 1:1 protection scheme example
426006-2333-013-A05
3-87

Maintenance Manual
Connecting the TP63_1

BG-30 populated with two PE1_63 cards in the ETS2 and ETS3 slots, and a
TP63_1 card in the ETS1 slot of the BG-30E. The ETS3 slot in the BG-30E
designates the protection card, and the ETS2 slot is the main (working) card.
NOTE: This configuration is recommended for protection of
63 E1s.
Figure 3-75: TP63_1_1 (two PE1_63 cards) 1:1 protection scheme example
BG-30 populated with one PE1_63 card in the ETS2 slot, one TP63_1 card in
the ETS1 slot of the BG-30E, and three PME1_21 modules in the TS1, TS2,
and TS3 slots of the BG-30B. The ETS2 slot in the BG-30E designates the
protection card, and the TS1, TS2, TS3 slots are the main (working) modules.
Figure 3-76: TP63_1_1 (three PME1_21 modules and one PE1_63 card) 1:1
protection scheme example
3-88
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connecting the TPS1_1

BG-30 populated with SMQ1&4 modules in TS2 and TS3 slots of the BG-30B,
and a TPS1_1 card in the ETS1 slot of the BG-30E. The TS3 slot in the
BG-30B designates the protection module, and the TS2 slot is the main
(working) module.
Figure 3-77: TPS1_1 (two SMQ1&4 modules) 1:1 protection scheme example
The following table describes the slot allocation for the TPS1_1 in 1:1
protection scheme for various STM-1 and DS-3/E3 traffic cards/modules.
Table 3-7: TPS1_1 1:1 I/O protection slot allocation
TP slots
I/O slots allocation

Protection
Main
ETS1, or ETS2, or ETS3
TS3
TS2
ETS1, or ETS2, or ETS3
XS3
XS2
ETS3
ETS2
ETS1
ETS1
ETS2
ETS3
426006-2333-013-A05
3-89

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting Data Interface

Cables to Ethernet Interfaces
Data cables with RJ-45 connectors are used for connecting FE interfaces on
data modules.
As part of the site preparations, Category 5 or better cables must be routed
from the relevant Ethernet DDF (if used) to the intended rack location and
connected to the RJ-45 connectors. Sufficient length must be available to
permit routing the cables to the appropriate level in the rack.
To connect data cables to an Ethernet interface:
1. Based on the site cabling diagram, route the data cables along the guides at
the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-30 unit.
2. Pull each data cable down to the level of the BG-30 unit.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack so
that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the BG-30 unit. Use
cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Connect the RJ-45 connector on the cable to the corresponding connector
on the data module front panel.
Routing and Connecting Electrical Cables

between the MCP30 and the ICP_MCP30
If an ICP_MCP30 is installed, an electrical cable with SCSI-36 connectors on
both ends is used to connect the ICP_MCP30 and the MCP30.
To connect the cable between the MCP30 and the
ICP_MCP30:
1. Route the cable to the rack side rails.
2. Pull one end of the cable to the level of the BG-30 platform.
4. Connect the cable connector to the Auxiliary connector on the MCP30 front
panel.
5. Secure the cable connector to the SM_10E traffic module connector with
cm to 44 N cm.
3-90
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
secure the cable connector, as this may damage the MCP30

module.
6. Pull the other end of the cable to the level of the ICP_MCP30.
through the appropriate opening near the ICP_MCP30 until the cable
connector is positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as
required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
8. Connect the cable connector to the SCSI-36 connector on the ICP_MCP30
front panel.
9. Secure the cable connector to the connector with the cable connector
screws marked J1 on the ICP_MCP30 front panel. Tighten the screws
manually. If you cannot reach the screws with your hands, use an
adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver (maximum blade size 0.6). Set the
tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N cm.
secure the cable connector, as this may damage the
ICP_MCP30.
Connecting the Timing (Clock) Cable

The timing cable is connected to the T3/T4 RJ-45 connector on the MCP30.
To connect the timing cable to the MCP30:
1. Route the timing cable along the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-30B
platform.
2. Connect the free end of the cable in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags to the T3/T4 connector on the MCP30 front panel.
426006-2333-013-A05
3-91
3-92

Maintenance Manual
426006-2333-013-A05
4
BG-30B Wall-Mounted
Installations
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 4-1
Wall-Mounted Cabinet .................................................................................... 4-2
DDF 21 E1s Unit ........................................................................................... 4-13
Wall-Mounted Frame .................................................................................... 4-34
Overview
In addition to the regular installation of the BG-30B in different racks, ECI
Telecom offers two options for wall-mounted installations:
Wall-mounted cabinet
Wall-mounted frame
These options are ideal for installations in small businesses or home offices
(SOHO).
The following sections provide detailed procedures for these installations.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-1
BG-30B Wall-Mounted Installations

Maintenance Manual
Wall-Mounted Cabinet
The cabinet is 352 mm high, 600 mm wide, and 400 mm deep and has a
transparent front door. It includes a rear panel with four support rails to which
two 19" vertical extrusions are fastened. The equipment and cabling
accessories are attached to these extrusions.
The side, top, and bottom covers can easily and quickly be removed, providing
comfortable user-friendly access to the interior for installation and management
of all components.
Figure 4-1: Wall-mounted cabinet general view
The wall-mounted cabinet is shipped dismantled in a flat-pack packaging,

saving up to 50 % of transportation volume and facilitating delivery to the
point of assembly.
4-2
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
The tools illustrated in the following figure are required for the installation (not
supplied with the cabinet).
Figure 4-2: Tools required for cabinet installation
Installing the BG-30B in a Wall-Mounted

Cabinet
The installation of a BG-30B in a wall-mounted cabinet includes the following
stages:
1. Installing the wall-mounted cabinet rear panel
2. Installing cabling accessories
3. Installing the BG-30B platform and ancillary equipment (three DDFs or
two DDFs and an AC CONV unit)
4. Connecting cables and fibers to the BG-30B platform and ancillary
equipment
5. Installing the wall-mounted cabinet covers and front door
426006-2333-013-A05
4-3

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Interior Components

Before you start:
Unpack the wall-mounted cabinet components and perform a visual inspection
according to the instructions in Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection
(page 3-5).
DANGER: Safety cannot be guaranteed if shipping
damage is evident! Shipping damage must be reported to the
shipping company and manufacturer immediately upon
receipt.
The wall-mounted cabinet interior components are shown in the following
figure.
Figure 4-3: Wall-mounted cabinet interior components
4-4
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Preparing the Rear Panel Holes

To prepare the rear panel holes:
1. Identify the prescribed location of the rear panel on the wall.
NOTE: Make sure that the wall surface on which the cabinet
is mounted is completely flat, so that the front door opens and

closes properly.
2. Place the enclosed drilling template on the prescribed position; align it at

the desired height using a bubble level and secure it to the wall.
Figure 4-4: Preparing the rear panel holes
3. Drill four holes using the four upper holes in the template (the cabinet is 6U
high).
NOTE: Use a drill of max. 8 mm.
DANGER: The operator is responsible for the secure

mounting of the cabinet to the wall, using appropriate
installation materials.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-5

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Rear Panel

mounting of the cabinet to the wall, using appropriate
installation materials.
NOTE: Use only the self-tapping screws, supplied with the
cabinet.
To install the rear panel:
1. Place the rear panel on the drilled holes and align it correctly so that it is
flat. Place support beneath as required.
2. Attach the panel to the wall and fasten with four screws.
Figure 4-5: Installing the rear panel
4-6
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the Support Rails

The rear panel has four holes for attaching support rails.
To attach the support rails:
1. Identify the four holes in the rear panel for the support rails (see the
following figure).
Figure 4-6: Installing the support rails
2. Attach a support rail to the rear panel and fasten with a hex screw using an
appropriate hex wrench.
3. Repeat Step 2 for the other three support rails.
Installing the 19" Vertical Extrusions

Two 19" vertical extrusions are attached to the support rails for the installation
of equipment and accessories.
To install the 19" vertical extrusions:
1. Place the extrusion at a distance of 104 mm (approx.) from the support rail
edge.
Figure 4-7: Installing the 19" vertical extrusions

426006-2333-013-A05
4-7

Maintenance Manual
2. Attach the extrusion to the upper and lower support rails with two hex
screws.
3. Fasten the extrusion with the screws using a hex wrench.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the second extrusion.
Installing the C-Rail

A C-rail (so called because of its C shape) is attached to the upper side of the
rear panel. The C-Rail helps support various cabling accessories.
To install the C-rail:
1. Identify the two holes for mounting the C-rail on the rear panel.
2. Place the C-rail on the rear panel. Insert a flat washer and a hex screw in
the appropriate hole and fasten the C-rail.
Figure 4-8: Installing the C-rail
3. Repeat Step 2 for the second hole of the C-rail.
4-8
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing Cabling Accessories

Several accessories are installed inside the cabinet to facilitate cable and fiber
routing and to ground it. They include:
Cable guides
Cable clamping bars
Fiber optic protective tube
Grounding cables
Figure 4-9: Cabling accessories installed in the cabinet
426006-2333-013-A05
4-9

Maintenance Manual
Installing Cable Guides

Cable guides are installed on both sides of the vertical extrusions and help
route cables neatly in the cabinet.
Before you start:
Identify the cable guide with its components according to the following figure;
the cable guide has an installation bracket attached.
Figure 4-10: Cabling accessories
4-10
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To install the cable guides:

1. Align the cable guide on the side of the extrusion to an approx. height of
178 mm from the lower support rail (see the figure Cabling accessories
(page 4-10)).
2. Attach the cable guide to the vertical extrusion with two screws, flat
washers, sprig washers and nuts, in the order shown in the figure Cabling
accessories (page 4-10).
3. Fasten the cable guide to the extrusion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the second cable guide.
Attaching Cable Clamping Bars

Two cable clamping bars are attached to the C-rail. They help route cables
neatly in the cabinet.
To attach the cable clamping bars:
1. Identify the cable clamping bar according to the figure Cabling accessories
(page 4-10).
2. Attach the clamping bar on the left side of the C-rail by snapping it on the
rail.
3. Attach the second clamping bar on the right side of the C-rail.
Attaching the Fiber Guide Tube

The fiber guide tube facilitates fiber routing in the cabinet. It is attached to the
right vertical extrusion, the right cable guide, and the right clamping bar.
To attach the fiber guide tube:
1. Identify the fiber guide tube attachment points according to the figure
Cabling accessories installed in the cabinet (page 4-9).
2. Attach one end of the fiber guide tube with a cable tie to the right extrusion
at a height of approx. 90 mm from the right lower support rail (see the
figure Cabling accessories installed in the cabinet (page 4-9)).
3. Shape the tube as shown in the figure Cabling accessories (page 4-10), and
attach it to the right cable guide (near the rear panel) with a cable tie.
4. Attach the other end of the tube to the right clamping bar with a cable tie.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-11

Maintenance Manual
Installing Grounding Cables

Five grounding cables must be installed in the wall-mounted cabinet. At one
end the cables are attached to the support rails as described in the following
procedure. The other end of the cables is connected to the cabinet covers and
door during their installation as described in Installing the wall-mounted
cabinet covers and door (page 4-31).
To install grounding cables:
1. Identify the attachment points of the five grounding cables according to the
figure Cabling accessories (page 4-10).
2. Connect the round terminal lug of a grounding cable to the left lower
support rail outer hole (near the rear panel) with a hex self-tapping screw;
fasten the cable to the support rail using a hex wrench.
3. Repeat Step 2 to connect four more grounding cables to the following
points:
Left lower support rail inner hole, near the rear panel.
Left upper support rail inner hole, near the rear panel.
Right lower support rail outer hole, near the rear panel.
Right upper support rail inner hole, near the front.
4-12
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
DDF 21 E1s Unit

The DDF unit supports connection of up to 21 E1 lines. The terminal blocks
connect the equipment side and the customer's E1 interfaces. The unit is 1U
high and can be installed in ETSI or 19" racks using reversible brackets.
The DDF is equipped with five connection blocks, each supporting connection
of five full E1 lines (transmit and receive). The block can also be wired to serve
only transmit or receive lines (total ten lines).
The rear side of the DDF tray includes a cable tie comb that facilitates cable
wiring. In addition, several cable retainers on the DDF tray help keep wire
routing and connection neat.
The connection blocks are attached to bushings located in front of the DDF
tray.
Figure 4-11: DDF general view
426006-2333-013-A05
4-13

Maintenance Manual
Assembling the DDF

The DDF comes dismantled and must be assembled in the field. Assembling
includes the following steps:
1. Installing the reversible mounting brackets
2. Attaching the connection blocks
Installing Mounting Brackets

The DDF has reversible brackets that by default are assembled for 19" rack
installation. If your installation is in a 19" rack, skip this procedure.
To attach the brackets for ETSI installation:
1. Unscrew the six M2.5 x 6 screws (three on each side) attaching the brackets
to the DDF tray. Keep the screws for the next steps.
Figure 4-12: Installing the brackets for ETSI installation
2. Rotate the bracket to the ETSI position; in this position the longer part of
the bracket is attached to the tray.
3. Use three M2.5 x 6 screws removed in Step 1 to attach the bracket to the
DDF tray.
4. Fasten the bracket to the DDF.
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 for the second bracket.
4-14
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Attaching Connection Blocks

Five connection blocks are attached to the DDF tray. Two blocks are attached
to each bushing pair except for the leftmost pair, to which one block is
attached.
Each block is equipped with a labeling cover that protects the contacts and
helps identify the wire connections for maintenance and repair purposes.
To attach the connection blocks:
1. Place the block in front of the corresponding DDF bushing pair as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 4-13: Attaching the connection blocks
2. Push the block on the bushings to snap it on.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to attach the other four connection blocks.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-15

Maintenance Manual
Wiring the E1 Cables to the DDF

The DDF terminal blocks connect the wires from the equipment and the wires
from the customer interfaces. The E1 cables from the equipment are routed to
the rear part of the DDF and passed to the connection blocks. The cables from
the customer E1 interfaces are routed to the sides of the DDF and connect to
the corresponding blocks.
The following sections describe the connection of the equipment and the
customer lines to the DDF.
Connecting Equipment Cables

The cables from the equipment are routed to the rear of the DDF tray. The tray
has a cable support comb to facilitate cable routing.
To connect an equipment E1 cable:
1. Route the E1 cable from the equipment to the rear part of the DDF.
2. Remove the outer cable jacket, as required, to expose the wire pairs.
3. Use cable ties as needed to attach the cable edge to the cable holder comb.
4. Route the wire pairs through the plastic frame (at the rear of the block).
5. Connect each pair to the corresponding block contacts according to the
wiring diagram.
Connecting Customer Cables

Cables from the customer interfaces are routed to the sides of the DDF tray.
The tray has cable retainers to help route customer cables neatly.
To connect a customer E1 cable:
1. Route the E1 cable from the customer's facility to the left or right side of
the DDF tray according to the position of the corresponding block.
2. Remove the outer cable jacket, as required, to expose the wire pairs.
3. Use cable ties as required to attach the cable edge to the cable retainers.
4. Route the wire pairs through the plastic frame (at the rear of the block).
5. Connect each pair to the corresponding block contacts according to the
wiring diagram.
4-16
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B and Three DDFs

In this configuration the BG-30B and three DDF units are installed in the
cabinet. Installation includes the following steps:
1. Installing clip nuts
2. Installing the BG-30B
3. Installing three DDFs
Figure 4-14: Installing a BG platform and three DDFs
426006-2333-013-A05
4-17

Maintenance Manual
Installing Clip Nuts for the BG and DDFs

Sixteen clip nuts, eight on each side, are attached to the two vertical extrusions
to support the BG-30B and DDFs.
To install the clip nuts:
1. Identify the locations of the clip nuts according to the following figure: the
numbers refer to the distance in mm of the clip nuts from the lowest hole (0
mm).
Figure 4-15: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG and three DDFs)
2. Place a clip nut in the required place at the rear side of the hole in the right
vertical extrusion, and push to snap it in.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other seven clip nuts on the right vertical
extrusion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to install eight clip nuts on the left vertical extrusion.
4-18
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual

The BG-30B platform is installed at the bottom of the cabinet.
To install the BG-30B platform:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-30B in the cabinet according to
the figure Installing a BG platform and three DDFs (page 4-17).
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place.
3. Fasten the platform to the vertical extrusion with four M6 screws and flat
washers.
Installing the DDFs

The DDFs are installed above the BG-30B in the cabinet.
To install the DDFs:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the DDF in the cabinet according to the
figure Installing a BG platform and three DDFs (page 4-17).
2. Place the DDF in the prescribed position, and then fasten it to the vertical
extrusions with four M6 screws and flat washers.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other two DDFs.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-19

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B, Two DDFs, and an AC

CONV Unit
In this configuration, the BG-30B, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit are
installed in the cabinet. Installation includes the following steps:
1. Installing clip nuts
2. Installing the BG-30B
3. Installing two DDFs
4. Installing the AC CONV unit
Figure 4-16: Installing a BG platform, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit
4-20
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing Clip Nuts for the BG, DDFs, and AC

CONV Unit
Sixteen clip nuts, eight on each side, are attached to the two vertical extrusions
to support the BG-30B, DDFs, and AC CONV unit installation.
To install the clip nuts:
1. Identify the locations of the clip nuts according to the following figure. The
numbers refer to the distance in mm of the clip nuts from the lowest hole (0
mm).
Figure 4-17: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG, two DDFs, AC CONV unit)
2. Place a clip nut in the required place at the rear side of the hole in the right
vertical extrusion, and push it to snap in.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other seven clip nuts on the right vertical
extrusion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to install eight clip nuts on the left vertical extrusion.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-21

Maintenance Manual

The BG-30B platform is installed at the bottom of the cabinet.
To install the BG-30B platform:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-30B in the cabinet according to
the figure Installing a BG platform, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit
(page 4-20).
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place.
3. Fasten the platform to the vertical extrusion with four M6 screws and flat
washers.
Installing DDFs
The DDFs are installed above the BG-30B in the cabinet.
To install the DDFs:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the DDF in the cabinet according to the
figure Installing a BG platform, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit (page 420).
2. Place the DDF in the prescribed position and fasten it to the vertical
extrusions with four M6 screws and flat washers.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second DDF.
Installing the AC CONV Unit

The AC CONV unit is installed in the upper position of the wall-mounted
cabinet.
To install the AC CONV unit:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the AC CONV unit in the cabinet
according to the figure Installing a BG platform, two DDFs, and an AC
CONV unit (page 4-20).
2. Place the AC CONV unit in the prescribed position and fasten it to the
vertical extrusions with four M6 screws and flat washers.
4-22
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Cabinet Grounding

The cabinet must be connected to the site grounding bar with a ground cable
according to ETSI recommendations.
The cabinet is supplied with a main grounding bolt welded to it. The grounding
stud is identified by the ground symbol label.
The bolt must be free of paint. The cabinet grounding bolt must be connected
to the site grounding bar by a grounding cable with a cross section of the same
size as the power feeding cable or thicker, as short as possible, in compliance
with UL/ETSI recommendations. ECI Telecom recommends using a grounding
cable of 12 AWG to 16 AWG. The cable must be made of copper strands with
a green/yellow jacket and terminated on both sides with bolt terminals.
To ground the cabinet:
1. Unscrew the nut and spring washer from the grounding bolt (M8 size) in
the cabinet. The grounding bolt is marked L2 as shown in the figure
Connecting grounding cables (page 4-33).
2. Connect the grounding cable from the site grounding (terminated with an
M8 lug) to the grounding bolt.
3. Attach the grounding cable with the nut and spring washer removed in Step
1, and fasten the cable to the bolt.
Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in

the Cabinet
cables must be routed in the space beneath the BG-30B platform and the
cabinet floor. All optical fibers are routed through the flexible tube attached to
the right side of the cabinet. The side to which the cables are passed is
determined by the side of the connectors on the BG-30B front panel. For
instance, power connectors are on the left side of the BG-30B, so the power
cables are routed on the left side beneath the platform. The cables are then
attached to the cable guide on the left side of the cabinet with cable ties.
When routing the various types of cables, several principles must be observed
to avoid electromagnetic and RF interference:
Traffic cables must not be routed in the same route as power cables.
Optical fibers must always be routed through the special flexible tube only.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-23

Maintenance Manual
The following sections provide detailed descriptions of cable and fiber

connection and routing.
Figure 4-18: Wall-mounted cabinet cabling
4-24
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Power Cables

The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the
BG-30B platform.
NOTE: To facilitate power cable routing, it is recommended
to start from the BG-30B platform towards the power source.
To connect power cables:

1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the power connector
on the BG-30B, and fasten it with its two screws.
2. Grasp the connector at the other end of the power cable, and thread it
through the space beneath the platform.
Figure 4-19: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing front view
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second power cable to be connected to the
corresponding connector on the platform.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the left cable guide of the cabinet.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-25

Maintenance Manual
5. Route the cable near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the cable guide and to the
cable clamp.
Figure 4-20: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing left side view
7. Route the cables through the opening in the top cover.

8. Connect the free ends of the power cables in accordance with the cabinet
installation plan and the cable tags to the DC power connectors on the
power source.
4-26
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Alarm Cables

The alarm cable is connected to the corresponding connector on the BG-30B or
ICP_MCP30 (if used).
To connect the alarm cable:
1. Connect the connector of the alarm cable, in accordance with the frame
MCP30 (if an ICP_MCP30 is not installed) or Alarms connector on the
front panel of the ICP_MCP30 (if installed).
2. Secure the cable connector to the MCP30 or ICP_MCP30 connector with
cm to 44 N cm.
3. Bend the cable and route it above the BG-30B and through to the left side
cable guide.
4. Route the cable near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cable holder and to the
cable clamp.
6. Route the cables through the opening in the top cover.
7. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable to the customer's facility in
accordance with the cabinet installation plan and the cable tags.
Connecting Optical Fibers

All optical fibers in the BG-30B platform are connected to the LC connectors
on the SFP/XFP transceivers. Optical fibers must be routed through the flexible
tube attached to the right side of the cabinet.
Before you start:

characteristics.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-27

Maintenance Manual
To connect an optical fiber to a BG-30B module/card:

1. Insert the end of the fiber into the upper end of the flexible tube and pull it
at the lower end, near the BG-30B.
2. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated
module/card. Leave some slack to prevent stress.
3. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
4. Remove the cover from the module/card connector and connect the fiber
connector to it.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for all optical fibers to be connected to BG-30B
modules/cards.
Routing and Connecting Electrical Traffic

Cables
Multipair cables are used to connect to the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces
located on E1 modules installed in the BG-30B.
Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or
receive). The cable end connecting to the E1 module is terminated with an
appropriate male connector.
To connect multipair cables:
1. Bring the cable connector against the appropriate slot and connect the cable
connector to the corresponding module.
2. Secure the cable connector to the module connector with the two cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually; if the screws cannot be
reached with your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
screwdriver.
3. Bend the cables and thread them through the left side cable guide of the
cabinet.
4. Route the cables near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
NOTE: The cable route described above assumes that the E1
module is installed on the left side in the BG-30B. If it is
installed on the right side, perform the same procedural steps
but on the cabinet's right side.
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the cable guide and to the
cable clamp.
4-28
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
6. Use a cabling diagram of the cabinet (or site) to associate module

connectors with the appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length
if necessary.
7. If the DDF is installed in the frame, see Wiring the E1 Cables to the DDF
(page 4-16) for connecting the E1 cables to the DDF wiring blocks.

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on
E3/DS-3 and electrical STM-1 modules.
As part of site preparations, suitable cables must be routed from the relevant
High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended cabinet location and connected to the
coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors. Leave sufficient length to permit
routing the cables to the appropriate level in the cabinet.
To connect coaxial traffic cables to E3/DS-3 or STM-1
modules:
1. Pull each coaxial cable to the level of the corresponding electrical
connection module.
2. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding
connector on the module.
3. Based on the cabinet (or site) cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in
groups according to the designated module and route them along the left
side of the cabinet.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the left side cable guide of the
cabinet.
5. Route the cables near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
NOTE: The cable route described above assumes that the
E3/DS-3 or electrical STM-1 module is installed on the left
side of the BG-30B. If it is installed on the right side, perform
the same procedural steps but on the cabinet's right side.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cable guide and to the
cable clamp.
7. Cut excess cable length if necessary.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-29

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables

Timing cables are connected to the T3/T4 connector of the BG-30B platform.
To connect a timing cable to the BG-30B platform:
1. Route the timing cables along the side of the cabinet.
2. Pull the cable down to the level of the T3/T4 connector and bend it until the
cable connector is positioned against the timing connector.
3. Connect the free end of the cable in accordance with the cabinet installation
plan and the cable tags to connector T3/T4 on the platform.
4. Secure each cable connector using its two screws.
5. Bend the cable and thread it through the right side cable guide of the
cabinet.
6. Route the cables near the right cable clamp on the C-rail.
7. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cabinet cable guide and
cable clamp.
Connecting Management Cables

Management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated MNG on
the BG-30B platform. Each cable is terminated with an RJ-45 plug.
To connect management cables to the BG-30B platform:
1. Bring the cable plug against the appropriate connector on the BG-30B.
2. Connect the management station cable to the MNG connector of the
platform in accordance with the frame installation plan and the cable tags.
3. Thread the cable through the space above the BG-30B and the left side of
the cabinet.
4. Bend the cable and thread it through the left side cable guide of the cabinet.
5. Route the cables near the right cable clamp on the C-rail.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cabinet cable guide and
cable clamp.
4-30
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Wall-Mounted Cabinet Covers

and Door
After completing the equipment installation and cabling, you are ready to
install the cabinet covers and door. After each cover is installed, a grounding
cable is attached to it.
Installing the Top and Bottom Covers

To install the bottom cover:
1. Slide the bottom cover into place while inserting the two protrusions on the
cover into the opposite housing on the rear panel (marked F1 in the
following figure).
Figure 4-21: Installing top and bottom covers
2. Fasten the bottom cover to the lower support rails with four self-tapping
screws (F2) (two on each side).
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the bottom cover (see
the following figure).
Figure 4-22: Connecting grounding cables
426006-2333-013-A05
4-31

Maintenance Manual
To install the top cover:

1. Slide the top cover while inserting the two protrusions on the cover into the
opposite housing on the rear panel (see the figure Installing top and bottom
covers (page 4-31)).
2. Fasten the top cover to the upper support rails with four self-tapping screws
(F2) (two on each side).
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the top cover.
Installing the Side Covers

To install the right side cover:
1. Slide the right side cover into place while inserting the two protrusions on
the cover into the opposite housing on the rear panel (marked J1 in the
following figure).
Figure 4-23: Installing side covers
2. Fasten the right side cover to the top and bottom covers with two Phillips
screws (J2), one on each side.
4-32
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the right side cover
(see the following figure).
Figure 4-24: Connecting grounding cables
To install the left side cover:

1. Slide the left side cover into place while inserting the two protrusions on
the cover into the opposite housing on the rear panel (see the figure
Installing side covers (page 4-32)).
2. Fasten the left side cover to the top and bottom covers with two Phillips
screws (J2), one on each side.
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the left side cover.
Installing the Front Door

To install the front door:
1. Slide the door upper hinge into the corresponding slot in the top cover (see
the following figure).
Figure 4-25: Installing the front door
426006-2333-013-A05
4-33
2.
3.
4.
5.

Maintenance Manual
Align the door lower hinge into the corresponding slot in the bottom cover.
Adjust the door to open and close freely.
Fasten the upper and lower hex screws with a hex wrench.
Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the door (see the
following figure).
Figure 4-26: Connecting the door grounding cable
Wall-Mounted Frame
The wall-mounted frame is another option for installing the BG-30B and
accessories in SOHO.
The wall-mounted frame is 300 mm high, 600 mm wide, and 350 mm deep.
The front transparent cover protects the BG-30B traffic and fiber cables against
unintended disconnection or bending.
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame

Wall-mounted frame installation includes the following steps:
1. Installing the cable supports
2. Installing the fiber guide tube
3. Preparing the frame installation holes
4. Installing the frame
Installing Cable Supports

Four cable supports are installed in the wall-mounted frame, two on each side.
To facilitate installation, install the cable supports in the frame before attaching
the frame to the wall.
4-34
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To install the cable supports in the frame:

1. Identify the cable supports according to the following figure; use this figure
as reference in the following steps.
Figure 4-27: Wall-mounted frame installation
The lower cable support is attached to the frame side in holes 5 and 8 from
the bottom as shown in the figure above.
2. Attach the lower cable support to the frame with four M3 Phill. screws,
spring washers, and flat washers.
3. Fasten the cable support to the frame.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for attaching the upper cable support to the frame. (The
upper cable support is attached to the frame side in holes 5 and 8 from the
top as shown in the figure above.)
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for installing two cable supports on the other side of the
frame.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-35

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the Fiber Guide Tube

The fiber guide tube facilitates fiber routing in the frame. It is attached to the
right side of the frame and fastened to the cable supports.
To attach the fiber guide tube:
1. Identify the fiber guide tube attachment points according to the following
figure.
Figure 4-28: Attaching the fiber guide tube
2. Attach one end of the fiber guide tube with a cable tie to the lower cable
support near the front of the frame.
3. Shape the tube as shown in the figure, and attach it to the lower cable
support (near the rear of the frame) with a cable tie.
4. Attach the tube to the upper cable support (near the rear of the frame) with
a cable tie.
4-36
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Preparing Installation Holes

The wall-mounted frame needs four installation holes.
To prepare the installation holes:
1. Place the wall-mounted frame on the prescribed location on the wall. Make
sure that the wall surface is flat and even.
2. Use the frame as a template and mark the required holes through the frame.
You can use the dimensions (in mm) in the following figure as reference.
Figure 4-29: Holes location for wall-mounted frame
3. Drill four holes in the wall according to the markings.
Attaching the Wall-Mounted Frame

mounting of the frame to the wall, using appropriate
installation practice and materials.
To attach the wall-mounted frame:
1. Place the frame on the drilled holes and align it flat. Place support beneath
as required.
2. Attach the frame to the wall and fasten it with four screws.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-37

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B and Accessories in the

Wall-Mounted Frame
ECI Telecom offers five configurations for installing the BG-30B and
accessories in the wall-mounted frame. You can select the most suitable
configuration according to your application.
The configurations are:
4-38
BG-30B and three DDFs (option 1)
BG-30B, a DDF, and a RAP-BG (option 2)
BG-30B, a DDF, and an ICP_MCP30 (option 3)
BG-30B, a DDF, and an AC/DC CONV unit (option 4)
BG-30B and a DDF (option 5)
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual

(Option 1)
Figure 4-30: Installing a BG and three DDFs
To install the BG-30B:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-30B in the wall-mounted frame.
2. Attach the BG-30B to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the BG-30B to the frame.
To install the three DDFs:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the lower DDF in the wall-mounted
frame.
2. Attach the DDF to the frame using four M6 Phill. screws and flat washers.
3. Fasten the DDF to the frame.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for installing the other two DDFs.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-39

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B, a DDF, and a RAP-BG

(Option 2)
Figure 4-31: Installing a BG, a DDF, and a RAP-BG

washers.
To install the DDF:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the DDF in the wall-mounted frame.
2. Attach the DDF to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat washers.
4-40
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual

1. Identify the prescribed position of the RAP-BG in the wall-mounted frame.
2. Attach the RAP-BG to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the RAP-BG to the frame.
Installing the BG-30B, an ICP_MCP30, and a

DDF (Option 3)
Figure 4-32: Installing a BG, an ICP_MCP30, and a DDF

washers.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-41

Maintenance Manual
To install the ICP_MCP30:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the ICP_MCP30 in the wall-mounted
frame.
2. Attach the ICP_MCP30 to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the ICP_MCP30 to the frame.
To install the DDF:
Installing the BG-30B, a DDF, and an AC/DC

CONV (Option 4)
Figure 4-33: Installing a BG, a DDF, and an AC/DC CONV
4-42
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual

washers.
To install the DDF:
To install the AC/DC CONV:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the AC/DC CONV in the wall-mounted
frame.
2. Attach the AC/DC CONV to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the AC/DC CONV to the frame.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-43

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B and a DDF (Option 5)
Figure 4-34: Installing a BG and a DDF

washers.
To install the DDF:
4-44
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame Front

Cover
The transparent cover protects the BG-30B traffic and fiber cables against
unintended disconnection or bending. The cover is attached to four holders on
the frame's front side.
The installation of the cover includes the following steps:
1. Installing the cover holders
2. Attaching the transparent cover
Installing the Cover Holders

Four holders are installed in front of the wall-mounted frame.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-45

Maintenance Manual
To install the cover holders:

1. Identify the cover holder positions on the frame according to the following
figure.
Figure 4-35: Installing the front cover
2. Insert a holder into the left upper groove on the frame and attach it with an
M4 Phill. screw, spring washer, and flat washer.
3. Fasten the holder to the frame.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to attach a holder to the left lower side of the frame.
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to install two holders on the right side of the frame.
4-46
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the Transparent Protection Cover

NOTE: The protection cover is attached in place only after all
cabling functions of the BG-30B and the other equipment,
described in Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the
Frame (page 4-48), have been completed.
To attach the protection cover:
1. Identify the cover and the four latch pins according to the figure Installing
the front cover (page 4-46).
2. Insert a latch pin into each corner hole in the cover.
3. Attach the cover to the holders by inserting the pins into the corresponding
holes in the holders.
4. Push the pin latches into the holders to lock them in place.
Connecting Wall-Mounted Frame Grounding

The frame must be connected to the site grounding bar with a grounding cable
according to ETSI recommendations.
The frame is supplied with a main grounding bolt welded on the right
installation bracket. The grounding stud is identified on the frame by the
ground symbol label.
The bolt must be free of paint and connected to the site grounding bar by a
grounding cable with a cross section of the same size as the power feeding
cable or thicker, as short as possible, in compliance with UL/ETSI
recommendations. ECI Telecom recommends using a grounding cable of 12
AWG to 16 AWG made of copper strands, with a green/yellow jacket and
terminated on both sides with bolt terminals.
To ground the wall-mounted frame:
1. Unscrew the nut and spring washer from the grounding bolt (M6 size) in
the frame. The grounding bolt is shown in the figure Routing and
connecting cable and fibers in the wall-mounted frame (page 4-48).
2. Connect the grounding cable from the site grounding, terminated with an
M6 lug, to the grounding bolt.
3. Attach the grounding cable with the nut and spring washer removed in Step
1, and fasten the cable to the bolt.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-47

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in

the Frame
cables are routed in the space beneath the BG-30B platform and the frame
floor. All optical fibers should be routed through the flexible tube attached to
the right side of the wall-mounted frame. The side to which the cables are
passed is determined by the side of the connectors on the BG-30B front panel.
For instance, power connectors are on the left side of the BG-30B, so power
cables are routed on the left side beneath the platform. The cables are then
attached to the cable supports on the left side of the frame with cable ties.
When routing the various types of cables, observe these principles to avoid
electromagnetic and RF interference:
Traffic cables must not be routed in the same route as power cables.
Optical fibers must be routed through the special flexible tube only.
Figure 4-36: Routing and connecting cables and fibers in the wall-mounted frame
4-48
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Power Cables

The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the
BG-30B platform.
NOTE: To facilitate power cable routing, it is recommended
to start from the BG-30B platform towards the power source.
To connect a power cable:
1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the power connector
of the BG-30B and fasten it with its two screws.
2. Grasp the connector at the other end of the power cable and thread it
through the space between the platform and the frame.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second power cable to be connected to the
corresponding connector on the platform.
4. Bend the cables and route them adjacent to the left side cable supports. Pull
the cables until the cable connectors are positioned against the appropriate
connectors on the power source. See the following figure for reference.
Figure 4-37: Wall-mounted frame cable routing - left side view
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the cable supports.
6. Connect the free ends of the power cables in accordance with the frame
installation plan and the cable tags to the DC power connectors on the
power source.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-49

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Alarm Cables

The alarm cable is connected to the corresponding connector on the BG-30B or
ICP_MCP30 (if used).
To connect the alarm cable:
1. Connect the connector of the alarm cable, in accordance with the frame
MCP30 (if an ICP_MCP30 is not installed) or Alarms connector on the
front panel of the ICP_MCP30.
2. Secure the cable connector to the MCP30 or ICP_MCP30 connector with
cm to 44 N cm.
3. Bend the cable and route it above the BG-30B and adjacent to the left side
cable supports.
4. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cable supports.
5. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable in accordance with the frame
installation plan and the cable tags to the customer's facility.
Connecting Optical Fibers

All optical fibers in the BG-30B platform are connected to the LC connectors
on the SFP/XFP transceivers.
Before you start:

characteristics.
4-50
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
To connect an optical fiber to a BG-30B module/card:

1. Insert the end of the fiber into the upper end of the flexible tube and pull it
at the lower end, near the BG-30B.
2. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated
module/card. Leave some slack to prevent stress.
3. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
4. Remove the cover from the module/card connector, and connect the fiber
connector to it.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for all optical fibers to be connected to BG-30B
modules/cards.

Cables
Multipair cables are used to connect the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces
located on the BG-30B or on E1 modules installed in it.
Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or
receive). The cable end connecting to the BG-30B or to the E1 module is
terminated with an appropriate male connector.
To connect multipair cables:
1. Bring the cable connector against the appropriate slot and connect the cable
connector to the corresponding module.
2. Secure the connector to the module connector with the two cable connector
screws. Tighten the screws manually. If the screws cannot be reached with
your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the space above the BG-30B and the
left side of the frame. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the
frame cable supports. See the figure Wall-mounted frame cable routing left side view (page 4-49) for reference.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the frame (or site) to associate module connectors
with the appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length if
necessary.
5. If a DDF is installed in the frame, refer to Wiring the E1 Cables to the DDF
(page 4-16) for connecting the E1 cables to the DDF wiring blocks.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-51

Maintenance Manual

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on
E3/DS-3 and electrical STM-1 modules.
As part of site preparations, suitable cables must be routed from the relevant
High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended frame location and connected to the
coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors. Leave sufficient length to permit
routing the cables to the appropriate level in the frame.
To connect coaxial traffic cables to E3/DS-3 or STM-1
modules:
1. Pull each coaxial cable to the level of the corresponding electrical
connection module.
2. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding
electrical connector on the module.
3. Based on the frame (or site) cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in
groups according to the designated module, and route them along the left
side of the frame.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the space above the BG-30B and
the left side of the frame. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to
the frame cable supports. See the figure Wall-mounted frame cable routing
- left side view (page 4-49) for reference.
5. Cut excess cable length if necessary.

Timing cables are connected to the T3/T4 connectors of the BG-30B.
To connect a timing cable to the BG-30B platform:
1. Route the timing cable along the side of the frame. Fasten the cable to the
cable supports, using cable ties.
2. Pull the cable down to the level of the T3/T4 connectors and bend it until
the cable connector is positioned against the timing connector.
3. Connect the free end of the cable in accordance with the frame installation
plan and the cable tags to connector T3/T4 on the platform.
4. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the frame cable supports.
4-52
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Management Cables

The management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated
MNG on the BG-30B platform. Each cable is terminated in an RJ-45 plug.
To connect management cables to the BG-30B platform:
1. Bring the cable plug against the appropriate connector on the BG-30B.
2. Connect the management station cable to the MNG connector of the
platform in accordance with the frame installation plan and the cable tags.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the space above the BG-30B and the
left side of the frame.
4. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the frame cable supports.
426006-2333-013-A05
4-53
4-54

Maintenance Manual
426006-2333-013-A05
5
Commissioning Tests
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 5-1
Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 5-1
Site Commissioning Tests ............................................................................... 5-2
SDH Commissioning Tests ............................................................................. 5-5
Data Network Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 5-11
Overview
After a new network has been installed and configured, commissioning tests
are performed to confirm that the installation is successful and that the network
is operating in accordance with the design specifications.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning procedures:
PDH transmission analyzer for testing PDH transmission performance
SDH transmission analyzer for testing SDH transmission performance
Data transmission test equipment for testing FE transmission performance
Optical Power Meter (OPM)
Set of optical attenuators with various values
Variable optical attenuator
FC-to-LC adapters
LC/FC optical patch cords
Multimeter
426006-2333-013-A05
5-1
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Suitable equipment is available from a wide range of manufacturers and

therefore no specific models are listed. You can use any equipment that meets
applicable international standards and has satisfactory measurement accuracy
over the range of operating parameters and environmental conditions that apply
to the specific network. If necessary, contact ECI Telecoms Field Engineering
Department for specific recommendations.
Site Commissioning Tests

Site commissioning tests verify the normal operation of BG-30 NEs. Perform
the following procedures on each NE at each site:
Verify the cards and modules installed in each platform.
Perform a visual inspection and mechanical checks.
Measure optical levels (see reference data in the BroadGate Product Line
General Description).
Checking Cards and Modules Installed in

Each Shelf
This check is performed to confirm that the required cards and modules have
been installed in each site, and to record their options, revisions, boot version,
and serial numbers.
The following table illustrates a typical inventory form.
Table 5-1: Card and module inventory BG-30 platform
5-2
Card/Module type
Slot
MCP30
MS
XIO30_1
XS A
Option
Revision
Boot
version
Serial
number
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks

The visual inspection checks for proper equipment installation, correct routing
and connection of cables, and other tasks, as follows:
Equipment installation documents provide the criteria for proper equipment

installation.
The site cabling diagram provides the criteria for proper cabling routing.
After completing the visual inspection tasks (items 1 through 18 in the

following table), power on the BG-30B platform to perform an additional set of
acceptance tests (items 15 through 19 in the following table). These tests check
the functions needed for carrying out the network commissioning tests. Consult
the BroadGate Product Line General Description and the BroadGate Product
Line Reference Manual for a description of the various card indicators and their
functions.
The following table provides a typical list for recording the results of a visual
inspection and mechanical check.
Table 5-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks
No.
Description of inspection/check
Check mechanical mounting of the rack.
Check the BG-30B/BG-30E installation; make sure that the

rail stiffeners are properly installed.
Check the ODF and FST installation and fiber connection (if
applicable).
Check the DDF installation and relevant cable connections (if

applicable).
Check ICP_MCP30 installation and relevant cable

connections (if applicable).
Check the grounding cable connections.
Check the DC power cable connections (main fuse to RAP,

RAP fuse to BG-30B/BG-30E platform).
Check the network manager station installation (if applicable).
Check the installation of modules and cards.
10
Check the connection of relevant cables or fibers for all cards

installed.
11
Provide DC supply voltage via the INF_30B or

INF_30BH/INF_30E on slot PSA to the RAP (-40 V to -75
V).
12
Provide DC supply voltage via the INF_30B or

INF_30BH/INF_30E on slot PSB to the RAP (-40 V to -75
V).
13
Power on the platform.
426006-2333-013-A05
Results
5-3
Commissioning Tests
No.

Maintenance Manual
Description of inspection/check
Results
14
Check the proper operation of both RAP power sources by

disconnecting one source at a time.
15
Check the communication between the BG-30B platform and

the LCT-BGF via the MNG Ethernet interface on the MCP30.
16
Check the proper operation of all fans.
17
Check LED operation using the LED TEST option in the

LCT-BGF.
18
Check slot assignment for all relevant cards and modules.
19
Check there are no abnormal alarms.
Measuring Optical Levels

These measurements check optical signal levels at the various equipment ports.
Before performing any other commissioning test, proper optical levels within
the limits specified in the BroadGate Product Line System Specifications must
be achieved for each optical component.
Perform these measurements using an OPM configured according to the
wavelength at the measurement port. For reliable measurement, do not connect
the OPM directly to a port but use a two-meter fiber. When measuring high
optical power levels, use attenuators to ensure that the power does not exceed
the maximum OPM input level.
The following table illustrates a typical data form for optical level
measurements.
Table 5-3: Measured optical levels
Slot
5-4
Module type
Port
Wavelength
Receive level
Optical
transmit level (dBm)
(dBm)
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
The measured power levels:
Must be within the range of minimum and maximum levels specified in the
BroadGate Product Line General Description for the transceiver plug-in
type installed on the corresponding port.
Must be within the expected range according to the optical network plan.
It is usually sufficient to measure the optical levels at the receive ports only. A
good port-receive level indicates that the components in the optical path up to
that port are properly connected and operating normally. If the result is not
satisfactory, perform additional measurements at the transmit port in the remote
site.
Platform Power-On Test Procedure

To power on the NE:
1. Perform slot assignments for all the relevant cards and modules in the
platform.
2. After 10 seconds, turn the platform circuit breaker off.
3. After 30 seconds, turn the platform circuit breaker on.
The equipment should automatically return to normal operation, without
user intervention and without any abnormal alarms in the system.
SDH Commissioning Tests

These commissioning tests check that SDH functionality is in accordance with
the system specifications.
Test Equipment Setup

The SDH tests are performed using a PDH analyzer, OPM, and variable
attenuators. Configure the OPM according to the measured wavelength.
The test conditions for the various interfaces are described in the following
sections.
Table 5-4: 2 Mbps tests
Framing
Unframed
Coding
HDB3
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
2 Mbps
Timing
Internal clock
Inject error
Code error
426006-2333-013-A05
5-5
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Framing
Unframed
Coding
HDB3
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
34 Mbps
Timing
Internal clock
Inject error
Code error
Framing
Unframed
Coding
B3ZS
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
45 Mbps
Timing
Internal clock
Inject error
Code error
Table 5-7: SDH tests
For SDH tests, configure the test equipment according to the interface type
being tested.
Signal rate
STM-1, STM-4
Mapping
Any mapping (preferably bulk)
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
155.520 Mbps, 622.080 Mbps
Timing
Received clock
Inject error
BIP error
Loss of Signal (LOS) Detection Test

This test verifies that NEs recognize alarms and send an alarm notification to
the management system for viewing.
To perform a LOS detection test:
1. Create NEs and links through the management system.
2. Disconnect the Rx optical fiber from one of the modules. A LOS alarm at
the SPI level of this module port appears, together with other alarms
generated by the disconnection.
5-6
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Network Timing Synchronization Test

This test checks that the BG-30 NEs synchronize properly and switch to the
next priority clock source when a failure occurs.
To perform network timing synchronization test:
1. Define one NE as the (internal) timing source to which all other NEs are
synchronized. This test can be done with an external timing source, if
requested.
2. Define several priorities for the timing source.
3. Disconnect the Rx fiber connected to the NE defined as the main timing
source.
If the NE has two or more timing sources, it synchronizes to the second priority
source, and an alarm is generated for the missing main timing source.
If the NE has only one timing source, the NE timing is set as hold-over and
an alarm is generated for the main timing source. Another alarm is generated to
indicate that there is no available timing source.
Input Sensitivity Test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the BG-30 optical modules is
according to specifications.
To perform an input sensitivity test:
1. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE
(in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Connect a variable optical attenuator to one of the fibers of the relevant
trail, and set the attenuator to 0 dB.
4. Increase the attenuation gradually until the test equipment displays a burst
of errors.
5. Connect an OPM to the first Rx point after the variable optical attenuator
and measure the total power. The measured optical power level is the input
sensitivity of the module.
6. Verify that the results are in accordance with the BroadGate Product Line
System Specifications.
426006-2333-013-A05
5-7
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Equipment Power-On Test

This test verifies that the BG-30 NEs continue operating properly after a power
break, without operator involvement.
To perform an equipment power-on test:
3. Shut off the power to one of the nongateway NEs within the relevant trail.
Errors and an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) alarm appear in the test
equipment. After approximately seven minutes, an NE disconnected
alarm appears in the management system current alarm list, and the NE
icon turns gray (indicates no communication).
4. Power on the NE and wait for it to perform the initial download to all
cards/modules in the platform. This can take five minutes.
5. Verify that the NE is connected to the management station and that there
are no relevant alarms in the test equipment or at the management station.
Traffic Stability Test

This test verifies that traffic operates according to ITU-T standards.
To perform traffic stability test:
3. Run this test for the appropriate time interval according to the following
table.
4. Verify that no alarms appear in the test equipment or at the management
station. You should achieve an error-free rate of 1 x 10-11 for 2 Mbps and
1 x 10-12 for all other rates.
Table 5-8: Traffic stability test time intervals
5-8
2 Mbps
34/45 Mbps
STM-1/VC-3
STM-4/VC-12
14 hours
7 hours
120 minutes
30 minutes
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Path Protection and Nonretrieval Test

This test verifies that SNCP traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.
To perform a path protection and nonretrieval test:
1. Create one protected trail of any rate between two NEs.
3. Disconnect one of the fibers in the active path of the trail. Short alarm
bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the
management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail.
4. Verify that the trail works properly on the protection path.
5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The trail remains on the protection path
(nonretrieve mode), and there is no alarm in the test equipment.
Severity Assignment Test

This test, which is performed on one BG-30 NE, determines the level of
urgency accorded to each alarm and creates an alarm-handling protocol.
When a fault is detected or removed, the NE updates the status of the LEDs and
reports the alarm activation or clearing to the management station.
To perform a severity assignment test:
1. Disconnect a fiber from one of the optical interfaces. An SPI LOS alarm of
critical severity appears on the management station for the BG-30 and the
MJR LED on the BG-30B panel turns on.
2. Reconnect the fiber. The SPI LOS alarm on the management station clears
and the MJR LED on the BG-30B panel turns off (only if there are no other
alarms on the BG-30 unit).
3. Change the severity of the SPI LOS alarm to minor.
4. Disconnect a fiber from one of the optical interfaces. An SPI LOS alarm of
minor severity appears on the management station for the BG-30 and the
MNR LED on the BG-30B panel turns on (only if there is no critical or
major alarm on the BG-30 unit).
5. Reconnect the fiber. The SPI LOS alarm on the management station clears
and the MNR LED on the BG-30B panel turns off (only if there is no other
alarm on the BG-30 unit).
426006-2333-013-A05
5-9
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Transmission Alarm-Handling Test

This test verifies that the BG-30 NEs can recognize an alarm and send an alarm
notification to the management system, and that the management system
displays it properly.
This procedure tests the following alarms: PDH-LOS, PDH-AIS, and SPI-LOS.
To perform a transmission alarm-handling test:
2. Connect PDH test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the
other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Disconnect the Tx cable of the test equipment. The management station
reports a LOS alarm for the relevant PDH port.
4. Set the test equipment to transmit an AIS (AIS = on). The management
station reports an AIS alarm for the relevant PDH port.
5. Disconnect the Rx fiber of an optical port. The management station reports
a LOS (SPI-LOS) alarm for the relevant optical port.
If ALS = off, the management station reports a far-end optical port
MS-RDI alarm.
If ALS = on, the management station reports a far-end optical port LOS
alarm.
Maintenance Action Test

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the BG-30 NEs
using the management system.
This procedure tests a near-end loopback, forced PDH AIS, forced low-rate
RDI, forced high-rate RDI, and forced MS-RDI.
To perform maintenance action test:
2. Connect test equipment to one NE. The PDH test equipment detects an AIS
alarm.
3. Perform a near-end loopback at the other trail endpoint. The AIS alarm in
the PDH test equipment clears, and no alarm or error remains on the PDH
test equipment.
4. Using the management station, execute a forced AIS on the PDH port that
connects to the test equipment. The PDH test equipment detects an AIS
alarm.
5. Using the management station, execute a forced low-rate RDI (or forced
high-rate RDI or forced MS-RDI) on a BG-30 platform. Another BG-30
platform reports a low-rate RDI (or high-rate RDI or MS-RDI) to the
management station.
5-10
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Data Network Commissioning

Tests
The data network commissioning tests check that data functionality is in
accordance with system specifications.
Throughput and Latency Tests

These tests determine the time it takes to transmit frames through the network,
and the maximum amount of data that can pass through the network before
frames are lost.
To perform throughput and latency tests:
1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate between two NEs in the
network.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports of
the other NE through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 throughput and latency
measurement.
4. Measure the throughput and latency for frame sizes 64, 128, 256, 512,
1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes, and record the results in the appropriate table.
NOTES:
Measured latency is for both the forward and return paths.

For a single path, the latency is 50% of the measured
value.
The latency test is dependent on the throughput results.
For example, if 10 Mbps is tested and the throughput is
4%, the latency test should be for 4 Mbps (2 * VC-12 = 4
Mbps).
Inject traffic according to the assigned bandwidth (VC-12
= 2.048 Mbps).
Table 5-9: Throughput and latency test results

LAN port and
speed
64
bytes/
frame
128
bytes/
frame
256
bytes/
frame
512
bytes/
frame
1024 bytes/ 1280

frame
bytes/
frame
1518 bytes/
frame
Throughput
Latency
426006-2333-013-A05
5-11
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
System Recovery and Reset Tests

These tests determine the speed at which a device recovers from a buffer
overflow condition or from a power failure.
To perform system recovery and reset tests:
1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate (for example, 10/100
Mbps) between two NEs.
the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports) through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate
and for any frame size.
4. Power off one of the NEs and verify packet loss in the test equipment.
5. Turn on the NE, wait five minutes, and verify that the errors in the test
equipment have cleared.
Frame Loss Rate Test

This test determines the number of frames that are lost when the system is
overloaded.
To perform a frame loss rate test:
1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails between two NEs.
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 for frame loss measurements.
Set to 100%.
The frame loss rate in % is defined according to the following formula:
[(input fps) - (output fps)] * 100 / (input fps)
fps = frames per second
For example, for a 100 Mbps test using 5 * VC-12 = 10 Mbps, with input
fps = 148810 and output fps = 14881, the frame loss is:
148810 - 14881 = 133929 (a 90% loss).
Table 5-10: Frame loss rate test results
Frame size
64
bytes/
frame
128
bytes/
frame
256
bytes/
frame
512
bytes/
frame
1024 bytes/ 1280

frame
bytes/
frame
1518 bytes/
frame
Frame rate
(% MFR) 100%
5-12
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Stability Test
This test determines the stability of the network by checking that it can
function with no errors for a defined period of time.
To perform a stability test:
1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate (for example,
10/100 Mbps) between two NEs.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate
and for any frame size.
4. Set the transmit rate in the test equipment to about 90% of the trail
bandwidth.
5. Run this test for two hours, and verify that no errors appear in the test
equipment.
Alarm-Handling Test
This test checks the alarm conditions forced on the NE and the subsequent
action carried out by the NE. It tests signal loss to both the data LAN port and
to the optical interfaces.
To perform an alarm-handling test:
1. Create two Ethernet trails of any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps) between
two NEs.
3. Disconnect the test equipment to create a signal loss to the data LAN port.
This generates a 10/100 Mbps - Link Down alarm.
426006-2333-013-A05
5-13
Commissioning Tests
5-14

Maintenance Manual
426006-2333-013-A05
6
Maintenance
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 6-1
Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials ............................................................. 6-1
Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................. 6-2
Onsite Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 6-3
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 6-24
Overview
This chapter provides maintenance procedures for BG-30 equipment.
Personnel involved in maintenance must be thoroughly familiar with safety
issues, as described in Before You Start (page 2-1).
Test Equipment, Tools, and

Materials
The only tools required for most maintenance activities described in this
chapter are an LCT-BGF terminal and a multimeter. If you need to make
measurements, it is recommended to use equipment of the same type and
models used for commissioning tests, see Commissioning Tests (page 5-1). The
tools and materials necessary for equipment installation must also be available
during maintenance.
426006-2333-013-A05
6-1
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Preventive Maintenance
The purpose of preventive maintenance activities is to keep the BG-30
hardware in good condition, and detect and correct as soon as possible any
condition that may lead to deterioration and equipment malfunction.
Record the execution of the various activities and their results according to the
procedures used in your organization.
Table 6-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks
Item
Inspection/Check
Intervals*
W
6-2
Visually inspect the condition of cables and fibers.

Check for correct routing (no sharp bends) and proper
support to avoid stress. Avoid touching fibers during
the inspection, except as required to correct problems.
Inspect equipment racks and cases, connection

terminals, grounding, etc. Pay special attention to any
signs of corrosion.
Check the condition of rack front doors and RFI

fingers. Clean as necessary with approved cleaning
agents.
Whenever applicable, inspect ancillary equipment (air

conditioners, lighting, distribution panels, etc.) and
their power sources.
Check that all unused optical connectors are covered by X

protective covers. Add covers as necessary.
Check that cards and modules are securely attached.

All module fastening screws must be tight (tighten only
manually).
Check for proper operation of the fans (no abnormal

noise and vibrations) in all NEs.
Clean all areas around the platform in the rack and the
racks front door (if applicable), using a vacuum
cleaner.
Check that the cables connecting the DC power sources X

(main and backup) to the RAP are properly connected.
10
Check that the external alarm cables are properly

connected to the RAP.
11
Check there are no alarm indications on the cards and

modules.
12
Check that all RAP LEDs turn on and that the buzzer
sounds while the POWER ON pushbutton on the RAP
panel is pressed.
X
X
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Item
Maintenance
Inspection/Check
Intervals*
W
13
Check that all card and module LEDs turn on when

performing the LED TEST operation using the
LCT-BGF.
Note: LEDs for FE interfaces and LEDs for Laser On
indications are not checked by the LED test operation.
14
Perform a visual check of LED indications.
15
Check the proper operation of the OW system (if

applicable to the NE).
* Legend:
W weekly
M monthly
Q quarterly
Onsite Troubleshooting
The purpose of onsite troubleshooting is to identify the hardware causing the
malfunction and return the equipment to normal operation as soon as possible.
Troubleshooting is usually initiated in response to one of the following
conditions:
Alarm or performance degradation reported by the management station.
Alarm or malfunction detected onsite by maintenance personnel, either as a

result of a troubleshooting activity initiated by the management center
personnel or as a result of a periodic inspection or preventive maintenance
action. Many problems can be detected via the various indicators available
on the BG-30 system components.
This chapter assumes familiarity with the BG-30, with SDH data, and with the
LightSoft and EMS-BGF management stations. See the respective user manual
for details on the various capabilities of the management stations and for
instructions on performing the necessary activities.
The following sections provide procedures for performing onsite
troubleshooting for various trouble categories. For each category, a
troubleshooting table provides instructions for identifying the problem.
To use the troubleshooting table:
1. Identify the closest description of the trouble symptoms under
Symptoms.
2. Perform the required corrective actions listed under Corrective actions in
the order they appear, until the trouble is corrected.
426006-2333-013-A05
6-3
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting Power Problems

Table 6-2: Troubleshooting power problems
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
RAP POWER
ON indicator
off
Both main and backup

power sources failed
Corrective actions
Equipment problem
6-4
Check the site power

distribution system.
Check the DC voltage at the
main and backup power
terminals of the RAP.
If the voltage is not within
the correct range, check
cable connections up to the
DC power distribution panel
and make sure no fuses are
blown.
Check the voltage supplied
by the main and backup
power sources.
Check the power
connections to the RAP.
Check the circuit breakers in
the RAP and replace if
necessary.
Check the voltage at the
BG-30B, BG-30E, and BG
OW end of each power
cable. Replace the cable or
repair the RAP if there is no
voltage present.
Check and reconnect cables
to the equipment, one by
one. If the circuit breaker
trips again when connecting
a specific unit, replace that
unit.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
All LEDs and

fans in
BG-30B off
No input power to the

corresponding unit
Corrective actions
BG-30B card Technical failure in the

FAIL indicator corresponding unit
on
Check the corresponding

circuit breaker in the RAP,
and reset any tripped
breaker.
Check the circuit breakers in
the RAP and replace if
necessary.
If the circuit breaker trips
again, disconnect the cable
protected by the
corresponding circuit
breaker from the equipment,
and check the voltage
polarity.
Check the power cable
condition and make sure the
cable is not damaged and
does not cause short circuits.
Check proper cable
connection at both ends.
Consult General
troubleshooting procedures
for BG-30B power-on,
based on LEDs on MCP30
panel for guidance in
resolving the problem.
If the problem still exists
after Step 1, replace the unit.
Troubleshooting Using Component

Indicators
The management station usually provides onsite personnel with a list of
suspected components.
Start the troubleshooting of a suspected component by checking its indicators.
These indicators, located on the various cards and modules, can help you to
identify a malfunctioning component rapidly and efficiently according to
procedures outlined in the following tables.
NOTE: For a description of indicator functions, see the
CAUTION: The following corrective actions are
traffic-affecting.
426006-2333-013-A05
6-5
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-3: General troubleshooting procedures for BG-30B power-on based on

MCP30 panel LEDs
Symptom
Probable cause
Corrective action
Indicators on MCP30 panel

FAIL
ACT
MJR
MNR
Off
Off
Off
Off
No power supply
on MCP30
On
On
On
Off
On
Blink
On
Off
No usable basic
boot inside the
MCP30 cards
flash
SD card out or
cannot be
detected
6-6
If all LEDs on the

platform are off, refer to
the Troubleshooting
Power Problems (page 64) table, item 3.
If the problem still exists,
try reinserting the
MCP30.
replace the MCP30 card.
after replacing the
MCP30 card, check for a
problem on the slot for
the MCP30. Replace the
platform.
Extract and reinsert the
MCP30 card.
replace the MCP30 card.
Extract the MCP30 card
and check if the SD card
is properly installed. If
not, extract and reinsert.
If there is no SD card,
install one.
extract the MCP30 and
replace the SD card in the
MCP30.
after replacing the SD
card, replace the entire
MCP30 card.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Symptom
Probable cause
Corrective action

FAIL
ACT
MJR
MNR
On
On
On
Off
Vx_Boot inside
SD card not found
On
On
On
Blink
Failed to load
Vx_Boot in the
SD card
On
Blink
Blink
Blink
Failed to mount
file system inside
SD card

MCP30.
extract the SD card from
the MCP30 card and
reprogram the SD card
via SD facilities (card
reader and SD loader
software).
replace the SD card.
MCP30.
the MCP30 card, and
software).
MCP30.
the MCP30 card, and
software).
On
Blink
Blink
On
File system inside Log in the MCP30 in boot

SD card
status using the LCT-BGF
unformatted
Boot Configuration Tool, and
then format the SD card.
On
Off
Off
Blink
Startup file for

loading software
not found
426006-2333-013-A05
Log in the MCP30 in boot

set the active version
properly.
6-7
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Symptom
Probable cause
Corrective action
6-8
FAIL
ACT
MJR
MNR
On
Off
Off
On
Invalid startup
file

set the active version
properly.
On
Off
Off
Off
Invalid startup
parameter

then set the active version
properly.
On
Off
Blink
Blink
Software package Log in the MCP30 in boot

not found
then download the version
and activate it.
On
Off
Blink
On
Failed to
decompress the
software package

then download the version
and activate it.
On
Off
On
Blink
Install file that

carries the basic
parameters for the
NE not found

then set the NE ID, gateway
mode, related IP, and mask
properly.
On
Off
On
Off
Invalid install file Log in the MCP30 in boot

properly.
On
On
Off
On
Invalid NE
parameter

properly.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Symptom
Probable cause
Corrective action

FAIL
ACT
MJR
MNR
On
On
Off
Blink
Failed to mount
file system 2
inside SD card

MCP30.
the MCP30 card, and
software).
For normal operation, after system power-on or card insertion, the LEDs on the
Tslot and XIO card panels are:
ACT: On
FAIL: Off
When MCP30 software is running normally, after three to five minutes, the
ACT LED starts to blink periodically and the FAIL LED is permanently off
when no failure is detected.
Table 6-4: General troubleshooting procedures for Tslot or XIO panels
Indicators on Tslot or XIO
module panels
FAIL
ACT
Off
Off
Probable cause
Corrective actions
No power supply
Check if caused by power

module failure or no power
input.
module.
replace the module.
When the MCP30 is operating normally, the ACT LED blinks periodically and
the FAIL LED is permanently off.
426006-2333-013-A05
6-9
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-5: General troubleshooting procedures for the MCP30

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
ACT LED is
permanently on
or off
Incorrect version or
database
Faulty Card
Corrective actions
FAIL indicator
on
Hardware failure
6-10
Perform a warm reset on

the BG-30B by pressing
the RST button.
If the ACT indicator starts
to blink, observe it for five
minutes to ensure that the
problem has been
resolved.
If the ACT indicator still
does not blink after a
warm reset, extract and
reinsert the MCP30.
try a version download
again, using the LCT-BGF
Boot Configuration Tool.
delete the NE database and
reconfigure the NE.
replace the MCP30 and
reconfigure the NE.
Obtain the BIT code of the
MCP30 from the
management system in
order to see detailed
information regarding the
failure. Then act
accordingly.
Perform a cold reset to the
card from the management
system or extract and
reinsert the card.
replace MCP30 card.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Table 6-6: General troubleshooting procedures on Tslot and XIO module panels
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Corrective actions
ACT indicator
permanently on
or off
Indicator failure
Select Maintenance > LED

Test in the LCT-BGF menu. If
the test executes successfully
but the indicator does not blink
for 10 seconds, the LED may
be damaged.
FPGA load failure

Software or system
problem
FAIL indicator
on
Card hardware failure
426006-2333-013-A05
Check whether the

BIT-Fail of the FPGA
load fail exists by
obtaining the BIT code of
the card using the
LCT-BGF or the
EMS-BGF. If yes, reinsert
the card or perform a cold
reset to the card.
If no FPGA load fail
exists, extract the MCP30
and reinsert it.
If the ACT indicator starts
to blink, observe it for five
minutes to ensure that the
problem has been resolved.
extract and reinsert the
faulty card.
power off the entire
BG-30B unit and power on
again, if permitted.
replace the card or
reconfigure the NE
database.
Obtain the BIT code from
the management system
(LCT-BGF or EMS-BGF).
This code details the
failure cause. Perform the
necessary actions based on
this code.
Reinsert or cold reset the
card. If the problem still
exists, replace the card.
6-11
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-7: General troubleshooting procedures for the INF_30B/INF_30BH and

INF_30BH
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green ACT
indicator always
off
Power failure
Corrective actions
Check if the input power voltage

is within the correct range. If
not, check the power problem
according to the Troubleshooting
Power Problems table.
Replace the
INF_30B/INF_30BH OR
INF_30BH.
Table 6-8: General troubleshooting procedures for the FCU_30B/FCU_30BH

No.
Symptoms
Green ACT
Power failure
indicator
permanently off
FAIL indicator
on
Probable cause
Fan fail
Corrective actions
Check the power system.

Replace the
FCU_30B/FCU_30BH.
Extract the module and reinsert
the unit.
replace the module.
The following table relates to the following cards/modules: XIO30_1,

XIO30Q_1&4, XIO30_4, XIO30_16, SMD1B, SMQ1&4, SMS4, and SMD4.
6-12
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Table 6-9: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green
transceiver
Laser On
indicator off
SFP module
damage
Corrective actions
Incorrect
configuration
426006-2333-013-A05
On the LCT-BGF, if the SFP

type cannot be obtained
successfully, the IDPROM of the
SFP module may be damaged.
Replace it.
If the SFP type information is
consistent with the expected SFP
type, force the laser on through
the LCT-BGF. The Laser On
indicator should be on. If not, the
SFP module or the optical
module is damaged. Replace the
damaged module.
On the LCT-BGF, check whether

there is a SFP-ID-Failure alarm in
the corresponding optical interface.
If yes, replace the SFP module
purchased from ECI Telecom. Then
check the SFP module type. If not
the expected SFP type, replace with
the proper type.
6-13
Maintenance
No.

Maintenance Manual
Symptoms
Probable cause
Corresponding
optical transmitter
may have been
turned off by the
ALS function (see
the following note)
Corrective actions
Check that all the fibers are

properly connected to the
corresponding optical
transceiver.
When available, select
Maintenance > Laser
Management > Laser Switch >
Force Laser On in the
LCT-BGF to activate the
corresponding laser.
Use an OPM to measure the
output optical power. If not
within the range of min. and
max. levels specified in the
BroadGate Product Line System
Specifications during a
90-second period, the problem is
in the transmit side of the
transceiver. Remove and reinsert
the transceiver.
Check the output optical power
again. If the output optical power
is still not within the range of
minimum and maximum levels
specified in the BroadGate
Product Line System
Specifications, replace the
transceiver.
If the problem still exists, check

the received optical power with
an OPM. If the optical power is
within the range of minimum
and maximum levels specified in
the BroadGate Product Line
System Specifications, replace
the transceiver.
If the problem still exists after
following the previous steps,
check the remote site.
If there are no problems on both
sites, the problem may be in the
optical fiber between the two
sites.
NOTE: Be sure to turn on the ALS
function after performing all checks.
6-14
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
NOTE: An optical port with ALS capability turns off its

transmitter when the corresponding receive signal is lost.
Turning the transmitter off may cause a chain reaction which
turns the optical signals off in a whole section of the network
and generates a large number of alarms. As a result, it may be
difficult to identify the real cause of the problem and you may
need to use the management station log records to identify the
port.
Each FE port has two LEDs that reside on the RJ-45 connector. One is a link
indication (green) and the other a speed indication (orange).
Table 6-10: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMFE_4_L1, DMFE_4_L2, and
DMEOP_4
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Link indicator
off
Disconnection or
consequent action of EoS
TSF/CSF
Corrective actions
426006-2333-013-A05
Check if a cable is
disconnected. If yes,
reconnect it.
Check if customer
equipment is powered off
or has a fault.
Check whether the CSF of
the related port is enabled
using the management
system. If CSF is enabled,
change it to disabled.
If the link is up after the
CSF is disabled, identify
the link-off cause,
according to the relevant
procedure.
extract and reinsert the
card.
replace the
DMFE_4_L1/DMFE_4_L
2 card.
6-15
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Speed indicator
off
10 Mbps link or link fail
Corrective actions
Check if 10 Mbps is the

expected speed for this
link. If yes, then no
problem exists. If the
expected speed is 100
Mbps, then this speed is
problematic.
Restart autonegotiation by
forcing the interface to
100 Mbps full-duplex
mode and then change it
back to autonegotiate.
Check whether the
customer equipment
supports autonegotiation.
If it does not, force the
port to the same mode
supported by the customer
equipment.
Table 6-11: General troubleshooting procedures for extended cards (PE1_63,

P345_3, SM_10E, ESW_2G_8F_E, S1_4, and S4_1)
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Both red FAIL

Boot damaged
indicator and red
Alarm indicator
do not turn off
after power-on
Extract the card and reinsert it

into the extended slot on the
BG-30E. If this does not
resolve the problem, replace
the module.
Green ACT
indicator off
Select Maintenance > LED

Test in the LCT-BGF menu
and check that the indicator
blinks for some time. If not,
replace the module.
Defective indicator
FPGA in module
downloaded
unsuccessfully
Corrective actions
6-16
Power off and wait a few

minutes before powering
on again.
If the Green ACT
indicator is still off,
download and activate the
NE embedded software
package either through the
LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
After the new embedded
software package is
activated, the ACT
indicator should be on and
the FAIL indicator off.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
No.
Symptoms
Maintenance
Probable cause
Defective module
Corrective actions
Red FAIL
indicator on or
not turning off
after power-on
and reset
Embedded software and

FPGA not downloaded
Damaged software or
defective card/module
426006-2333-013-A05
If the ACT indicator is

still off, replace the
module.
If the ACT indicator is
still off, replace the
BG-30B unit.
minutes before powering
on again.
If the Red FAIL indicator
is still on, download and
activate the NE embedded
software package either
through the LCT-BGF or
the Boot Configuration
Tool.
software package is
activated, the ACT
Perform a warm reset on
the BG-30B by pushing
the RST button.
If the FAIL indicator is on
after reset, download and
activate the NE embedded
software package either
through the LCT-BGF or
the Boot Configuration
Tool.
After the software is
completely downloaded to
the BG-30B, the ACT
If the FAIL indicator turns
on again, replace the
module.
6-17
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-12: Special troubleshooting procedures for P345_3 card

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Corrective actions
Orange mode
indicator off
Corresponding port
configured to E3
Check with the management station

operator to determine whether the
module has already been
configured for DS-3. If not, ignore
the state of the Mode indicator.
Defective indicators
If the port is in DS-3 mode, the

indicator should be on. If not,
replace the card.
Table 6-13: Special troubleshooting procedures for ESW_2G_8F_E cards

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Right green
LED in the
FE-P1~FE-P8
RJ-45 off
Link down or
defective indicator
Corrective actions
Left orange
LED in the
FE-P1~FE-P8
RJ-45 off
10 Mbps link or
defective indicator
6-18
No trail on the corresponding

Ethernet ports indicates a
normal state.
If there are trails on the
corresponding Ethernet ports,
check whether there is a CSF
alarm in the corresponding
Ethernet trails.
If yes, try to find the reason for
the CSF problems and resolve
it. Check the link status again.
Make sure the cable connected
to the corresponding port is not
damaged.
Connect the cable to an
Ethernet analyzer. If a normal
signal is detected, the indicator
is defective or the port is
unavailable. Replace the card.
Check the port attributes in the
LCT-BGF. If the speed status
is 10 Mbps, it is in normal
state.
If the speed status in the
LCT-BGF is 100 Mbps, the
BG-30B or indicator is
defective. Replace the card.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green
SFP module
transceiver laser damaged
of GbE LAN
indicator off
Corrective actions
On the LCT-BGF, get the

current alarm, if there is a
SFP-ID-Fail alarm, the
IDPROM of the SFP module
may be damaged. Replace it.
Force the laser on through the
LCT-BGF. The laser on
the SFP module or the optical
module is damaged. Replace
the damaged module.
Table 6-14: General troubleshooting procedures for daughterboards on SM_10E

cards
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green ACT
Defective indicator
indicator off after or defective
power on or reset daughterboard
Corrective actions
Defective Dslot on
SM_10E
2
Red FAIL
BIT fail
indicator on after
power on or reset
426006-2333-013-A05
Check whether the SM_10E

card is running, meaning that
the ACT LED is blinking. If
yes, extract the daughterboard
and reinsert it.
If the Green ACT indicator
does not turn on too, replace
the daughterboard.
If replacing the daughterboard does

not resolve the problem, replace the
SM_10E card.
Replace the module.
6-19
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-15: Special troubleshooting procedures for SM_EOP daughter boards

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Left green LED

in the Port 1 or
Port 2 RJ-45 off
Link down or
defective indicator
Corrective actions
Right orange
10 Mbps link or
LED in the Port defective indicator
1 or Port 2 RJ-45
off

normal state.
Ethernet trails.
the CSF problem and resolve
it, and check the link status
again.
damaged.
is defective or the port is
state.
indicator is defective. Replace
the card.
Table 6-16: Special troubleshooting procedures for OW box

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green ACT
indicator is
always off
Power failure
Corrective actions

minutes before powering on
again.
If the indicator is still off,
replace the OW box.
Select Maintenance > LED Test

in the LCT-BGF menu, and check
that the indicator blinks for some
time. If not, replace the OW box.
2.
6-20
Both ACT and

Fail Indicators
blink
S/W on OW box
damaged
Replace OW box.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Red FAIL
indicator on
Connection between
OW and BG-30B
failure or faulty OW
box
Corrective actions
Green In Use
indicator off
Green NET A
indicator off
Defective indicator

OW phone not in
use
If the OW phone is on the hook,

the indicator should be off; it is
normal. Pick the phone up; the
indicator should be on.
Defective indicator

OW not working on Check if OW is working on group

Group A
A. If not, ignore the state of the
indicator.
Defective indicator
Green NET B
indicator off

OW not working on Check if OW is working on group

Group B
B. If not, ignore the state of the
indicator.
Defective indicator
426006-2333-013-A05
Check the alarms on the OW

through LCT-BGF.
If there is Card-out alarm,
check the connection between
BG-30B and the OW box, and
try to solve it by reconnecting
or replacing the cable.
If there is a BIT-fail alarm,
replace the OW box.

6-21
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-17: Special troubleshooting procedures for TP21_2/TP63_1/TPS1_1 cards

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green ACT
Defective indicator
indicator off
or power fault
after power-on or
reset
Defective card
Corrective actions
Extract the card and reinsert it. If

the indicator is still off, replace the
card.
Red FAIL
indicator on or
not turning off
after power-on
and reset
FPGA not
downloaded
Yellow traffic
indicator off
If the ACT indicator is still off,

replace the module.
If the ACT indicator is still off,
replace the BG-30E unit.
minutes before powering on.
If the Red FAIL indicator is
still on, download and activate
the NE embedded software
package either through the
LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
software package is active, the
ACT indicator should be on
and the FAIL indicator off.
Corresponding port
not on the working
path
Check with the management station

operator to determine whether the
port is on the working path. If not,
ignore the state of the Mode
indicator.
Defective indicators
If the port is on the working path,

the indicator should be on. If not,
replace the card.
Table 6-18: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMFX_4_L1 and DMFX_4_L2

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green transceiver SFP module

laser of FX LAN damaged
indicator off
Corrective actions
6-22
If there is an SFP-ID-Fail
alarm, on the LCT-BGF, the
LCT-BGF; the laser on
the damaged module.
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Table 6-19: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMGE_1_L1

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Right green LED Link down or

in the RJ-45 off defective indicator
Corrective actions
Left orange LED 10 Mbps link or

in the RJ-45 off defective indicator
Green
transceiver laser
of GbE LAN
indicator off
SFP module
damaged
426006-2333-013-A05

normal state.
Ethernet trails.
the CSF problem and resolve.
Check the link status again.
damaged.
is defective or the port
state.
BG-30B or indicator is
defective. Replace the card.
current alarm. If there is an
LCT-BGF; the laser on
the damaged module.
6-23
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-20: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMGE_4_L1 and DMGE_2_L2

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green transceiver SFP module damaged

laser of GbE
LAN indicator
off
Corrective actions

current alarm. If there is an
IDPROM of the SFP
module may be damaged.
Replace it.
Force the laser on through
the LCT-BGF. The laser
on indicator should be on.
If not, the SFP module or
the optical module is
damaged. Replace the
damaged module.
Replacing Cards and Modules

Safety and Workmanship
Refer to Before You Start (page 2-1) for safety and workmanship instructions.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices
PROPER HANDLING AND GROUNDING
PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED
BG-30 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD. To
prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions
listed in Protection Against ESD (page 2-22). Keep parts and
cards in their antistatic packaging material until you are ready
to install them.
Use an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded
equipment frame or rack when handling cards and modules
during installation, removal, or connection to internal
connectors.
6-24
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Before you start:

When inserting cards and modules, be sure to carefully align the card/module
with the platform guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion,
immediately retract the card/module and repeat the process.
Hold the card/module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it
slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
cards/modules.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening screws of cards and
modules.
Visually inspect the card and the mating backplane connectors and make sure
that there are no signs of physical damage. In particular, check for bent
connector pins.
Before replacing any card, module, or optical transceiver:
1. Check that the replacement component has not been physically damaged
during shipment.
2. Remove the replacement component from its antistatic protection
packaging, and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during
shipment. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions as indicated on the component
identification labels, and make sure they are compatible with those of the
component to be replaced.
After replacing a component:
1. Place it in its antistatic protection packaging and close it.
2. Attach a report to the packaging explaining the reason for the replacement,
and identify the network site, physical location, platform, and time of
replacement.
426006-2333-013-A05
6-25
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Replacing the MCP30 Card

CAUTION: Replacing the MCP30 card does not affect traffic
on other Tslot cards. However, T3/T4 synchronization
signals, the E1-based DCC clear channel, and OW traffic are
unavailable for the duration of the replacement.
To replace an MCP30 card in the BG-30B platform:

1. Mark each cable connected to the MCP30 card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the MCP30 card.
3. Loosen and remove the two screws.
4. Hold the handle on the MCP30 panel and pull the card to be replaced
outward until it is released from the backplane.
5. Continue to hold the handles and gently pull the card out of the platform.
6. Extract the SD (or CF) card from the replaced MCP30 card. Push the SD
(or CF) card and then release it to remove the card from the slot
automatically.
7. Insert the SD (or CF) card into the replacement MCP30 card. Be sure the
card is properly locked.
8. Insert the rear end of the replacement card into the corresponding card
guides.
9. Push the replacement card in until the front panel of the card is flush with
are flush, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.
10. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the card to the BG-30B platform.
11. Reconnect all cables for the MCP30 card according to the cable marks.
6-26
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Replacing XIO30 Cards

CAUTION: Because of XIO30 card redundancy, all the traffic
on the main XIO30 can be protected by the standby XIO30
when replacing the main card. To avoid breaks in traffic, the
XIO30 cards must be replaced one by one. It is important that
the standby XIO30 card be running before replacing the main
XIO30 card.
To replace an XIO30 card in the BG-30B platform:

1. Mark the fibers connected to the XIO30 card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all fibers connecting the XIO30 card.
4. Hold the handle on the XIO30 card panel and pull the card to be replaced
guides.
9. Reconnect the fibers for the XIO30 card according to the cable marks.
Replacing Tslot Cards

To replace a Tslot card in the BG-30B platform:
1. Mark each cable connected to the Tslot card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the Tslot card.
4. Hold the handle on the Tslot card panel and pull the card to be replaced
guides.
9. Reconnect all cables for the Tslot card according to the cable marks.
426006-2333-013-A05
6-27
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Replacing Eslot Cards

NOTE: All Eslot cards support live insertion. There is no
need to power-off the BG-30B or the BG-30E units when
replacing them.
To replace an Eslot card in the BG-30E platform:
1. Mark each cable connected to the Eslot card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the Eslot card.
4. Hold the handles on the Eslot card panel and pull the module to be replaced
5. Continue to hold the handles and gently pull the module out of the
platform.
6. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding
module guides.
7. Push the replacement module in until the front panel of the module is flush
with the front of the BG-30E platform. If resistance is felt before the
connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-30E platform.
9. Reconnect all cables for the Eslot card according to the cable marks.
Replacing Traffic Modules on the SM_10E

NOTE: All traffic modules on the SM_10E support live
insertion. There is no need to extract the SM_10E card when
replacing a module.
To replace a traffic module on the SM_10E:
1. Mark each cable connected to the traffic module on the SM_10E card for
identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the traffic module.
4. Hold the handles on the traffic module panel and pull the module to be
replaced outward until it is released from the SM_10E card.
5. Continue to hold the handle and gently pull the module out of the card.
module guides.
6-28
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
with the front of the SM_10E card. If resistance is felt before the
connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the SM_10E card.
9. Reconnect all cables for the traffic module according to the cable marks.
Replacing ICPs for the SM_10E

To replace an ICP for the SM_10E:
1. Mark each cable connected to the ICP for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the ICP.
3. Loosen and remove the four screws.
4. Replace the ICP and close the screws to fasten the ICP to the platform.
5. Reconnect all cables for the ICP according to the cable marks.
Replacing Power Modules

CAUTION:
If using a DC power supply, each BG-30B/BG-30E

platform has two power modules. Replacing the power
module therefore does not cause the NE to power off.
Replace INF_30 modules one at a time so that the system
is not powered off.
To replace the power module:

1. Cut off the power source connected to the power module by turning off the
corresponding power switch on the RAP.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the replaced power module on the panel.
3. Open the two screws fastening the power module to the platform.
4. Hold the handle on the panel and pull the module to be replaced outward
until it is released from the backplane.
platform.
module guides.
with the front of the BG-30B or BG-30E platform. If resistance is felt
before the connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the
procedure.
426006-2333-013-A05
6-29
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-30B or
BG-30E platform.
9. Reconnect the power cable to the replacement power module.
10. Turn on the power switch on the RAP.
Replacing the
FCU_30B/FCU_30BH/FCU_30E Module
CAUTION:
Each BG-30B/BG-30E platform has one FCU module.

Replace the FCU module as soon as needed, as the
temperature inside the BG-30B/BG-30E continues to rise
without the fan unit. The high temperature can cause
hardware damage.
To replace an FCU_30B/FCU_30BH/FCU_30E module in the

BG-30B/BG-30E platform:
1. Loosen and remove the screws on the panel.
2. Hold the handle on the FCU_30B/FCU_30BH/FCU_30E panel and pull the
module to be replaced outward until it is released from the backplane.
platform.
4. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding card
guides.
with the front of the BG-30B/BG-30E platform. If resistance is felt before
the connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
6. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-30B/BG-30E
platform.
Replacing an ICP for the MCP30

To replace an ICP for the MCP30:
1. Mark each cable connected to the ICP for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the ICP.
3. Loosen and remove the four screws.
4. Replace the ICP and close the screws to fasten the ICP to the platform.
5. Reconnect all cables for the ICP according to the cable marks.
6-30
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers

ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP/XFP transceivers in all optical and
electrical STM-1 interfaces. Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe
the safety precautions described in Before You Start (page 2-1) during the
replacement.
To replace an SFP/XFP transceiver:
1. Mark each fiber or cable connected to the transceiver for identification
purposes.
2. Identify the position of the SFP/XFP transceiver to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the fibers or cables connected to the transceiver.
4. Remove the transceiver plug-in by pulling its tab.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement transceiver plug-in into the prescribed
position, and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place (see the following figure). If you feel resistance before the
transceiver plug-in is fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the
process.
Figure 6-1: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an XIO module
6. Reconnect the fibers or cables disconnected in Step 3.
426006-2333-013-A05
6-31
Maintenance
6-32

Maintenance Manual
426006-2333-013-A05
A
Connection Data
In this appendix:
Overview ........................................................................................................ A-2
INF_30B/INF_30BH/INF_30E DC Input Power Connectors ........................ A-2
AC_CONV_30B/AC_CONV_30E AC Input Power Connectors .................. A-2
MNG Ethernet Connector ............................................................................... A-3
T3/T4 Timing Connector ................................................................................ A-4
Auxiliary Connector on the MCP30 ............................................................... A-5
RS-232 Connector .......................................................................................... A-7
Orderwire Connector ...................................................................................... A-8
V.11 Overhead Connector .............................................................................. A-9
Alarms Connector ......................................................................................... A-10
E1 Connectors on the PME1_21 .................................................................. A-11
PME1_63 Connection Data .......................................................................... A-15
Ethernet Interface Connectors ...................................................................... A-23
PM345_3 Card Connection Data .................................................................. A-23
P345_3E Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-23
PE1_63 Card Connection Data ..................................................................... A-23
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data........................................................ A-24
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection Data ............................................................ A-24
DMGE_1_L1 Connection Data .................................................................... A-25
TP21_2 Connection Data.............................................................................. A-25
TP63_1 Connection Data.............................................................................. A-30
TPS1_1 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-31
SM_10E Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-31
ICP_VF Connection Data ............................................................................. A-44
ICP_V24 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-45
ICP_V35 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-48
ICP_V11_V24 Connection Data .................................................................. A-49
ICP_DB37D Connection Data...................................................................... A-51
RAP-4B Connectors ..................................................................................... A-55
426006-2333-013-A05
A-1
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Overview
This appendix provides connection data for the user connectors located in the
BG-30B/BG-30E platforms and associated ancillary equipment supplied by
ECI Telecom.
Any connectors not described in this appendix are reserved for use by ECI
Telecom technical support personnel and/or future expansion, and therefore no
user equipment may be connected to them.
INF_30B/INF_30BH/INF_30E
DC Input Power Connectors
The DC input power connectors, designated POWER IN, are 3-pin D-type
male connectors located on the INF_30B/INF_30BH/INF_30E panel. The
following figure identifies the functions of the POWER IN connector pins, as
Figure A-1: POWER IN input power connector, pin functions
AC_CONV_30B/AC_CONV_30E
AC Input Power Connectors
AC input power connectors are located on the
AC_CONV_30B/AC_CONV_30E front panel, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure A-2: AC input power connector
A-2
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
MNG Ethernet Connector

The Ethernet connector located on the MCP30 panel, designated MNG, is an
eight-pin RJ-45 connector providing an Ethernet 10BaseT management
interface.
The Ethernet connector is wired as a station port intended for direct connection
through a straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT Ethernet hub.
The following figure identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into
the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for a typical connector.
Figure A-3: Ethernet connector, PIN identification

Table A-1: Ethernet connector, pin assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
TX+
Transmit, + wire
Output
TX-
Transmit, - wire
Output
RX+
Receive, + wire
Input
4, 5
N/C
Not connected
---
RX-
Receive, - wire
Input
N/C
Not connected
---
N/C
Not connected
---
426006-2333-013-A05
A-3
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
T3/T4 Timing Connector

The T3/T4 timing connector is an RJ-45 connector located on the MCP30 panel
and designated T3/T4. The interface includes a group of lines that are usually
connected to the site timing reference distribution subsystem:
Clock input (T3 2.048 Mbps or 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703
interface)
Clock output (T4 2.048 Mbps or 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703
interface)
the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for the connector. It also lists
the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered
by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Figure A-4: T3/T4 connector, pin identification

Table A-2: T3/T4 connector, PIN identification
A-4
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CLK2MHZ_IN(A)
2 MHz clock input
Input
Blue
CLK2MHZ_IN(B)
Input
White/Blue
CLK2MHZ_OUT(A)
2 MHz clock output Output
CLK2MHZ_OUT(B)
Output
White/Green
CLK2MBIT_IN(A)
Input
Brown
CLK2MBIT_IN(B)
Input
White/Brown
CLK2MBIT_OUT(A)
Output
Orange
CLK2MBIT_OUT(B)
Output
White/Orange
2 Mbps clock input

2 Mbps clock
output
Green
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Auxiliary Connector on the

MCP30
The MCP30 provides one Auxiliary interface on its front panel. This 36-pin
VHDCI female connector serves V.11, RS-232, alarm, and OW signals. There
are two options for using this connector:
If only Alarms interfaces are used, a special alarm cable supplied by ECI
Telecom can be connected to the Auxiliary connector directly and can only
serve alarm signals.
If other interfaces are also used, the ICP_MCP30, which distributes the
concentrated Auxiliary connector into dedicated connectors for each
function, must be connected to this Auxiliary connector through a
back-to-back cable.
the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for a typical connector. It also
lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables
offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Figure A-5: Auxiliary connector for MCP30/MCP64, pin identification

Table A-3: 1-11 Auxiliary connector, pin assignment
Pin in VHDCI36
MCP30
Name
Function
Direction
Pin in SCSI-36
ICP_MCP30
AL_INA1
First alarm input wire A
Input
AL_INB1
First alarm input wire B
Input
AL_INA3
Third alarm input wire A
Input
AL_INB3
Third alarm input wire B
Input
AL_OUTA1
First alarm output wire A
Output
AL_OUTB1
First alarm output wire B
Output
AL_OUT3(B2)
Third alarm output,

normally open
Output
N/C
Not connected
---
RXD
Channel receive
Input
10
N/C
Not connected
---
10
426006-2333-013-A05
A-5
Connection Data
A-6

Maintenance Manual
Pin in VHDCI36
MCP30
Name
Function
Direction
Pin in SCSI-36
ICP_MCP30
11
OW_2M_INP
Orderwire input wire A
Input
11
12
OW_2M_INN
Orderwire input wire B
Input
12
13
V11TXDA
Transmit data A
From DTE
13
14
V11TXDB
Transmit data B
From DTE
14
15
V11RCLKA
Receive timing A
To DTE
15
16
V11RCLKB
Receive timing B
To DTE
16
17
V11RXDA
Receive data A
To DTE
17
18
V11RXDB
Receive data B
To DTE
18
19
AL_INA2
Second alarm input wire A
Input
19
20
AL_INB2
Second alarm input wire B
Input
20
21
AL_INA4
Fourth alarm input wire A
Input
21
22
AL_INB4
Fourth alarm input wire B
Input
22
23
AL_OUTA2
Second alarm output wire A Output
23
24
AL_OUTB2
Second alarm output wire B Output
24
25
AL_OUTA3
Third alarm output,

common
Output
25
26
AL_OUT3(B1)
Third alarm output,

normally closed
Output
26
27
RS232_GND
Ground
---
27
28
TXD
Channel transmit
Output
28
29
OW_2M_OUTP
Orderwire output wire A
Output
29
30
OW_2M_OUTN
Orderwire output wire B
Output
30
31
V11_RCA
Terminal timing A
From DTE
31
32
V11_RCB
Terminal timing A
From DTE
32
33
V11_TCLKA
Transmit timing A
To DTE
33
34
V11_TCLKB
Transmit timing B
To DTE
34
35
V11_GND
GND
---
35
36
CGND
CGND
---
36
Shell
---
Braid
---
Shell
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
RS-232 Connector
One RS-232 connector provides a debug RS-232 interface; it's an RJ-45
connector located on the ICP_MCP30 panel and designated RS-232.
The following figure shows an RS-232 cable from the RJ-45 connector to the
DB-9 female connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment for both
the RJ-45 connector and the DB-9 connector, when using the RS-232 cable
supplied by ECI Telecom.
Figure A-6: RS-232 overhead connectors, pin identification
Figure A-7: RS-232 overhead cable
Figure A-8: RS-232 overhead cable label
426006-2333-013-A05
A-7
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-4: RS-232 connectors, pin assignment

Pin in RJ-45
Name
Function
Direction
Pin in DB-9
COM-TX
Channel transmit
Output
GND
Ground
---
3, 4, 5, 6
---
Not connected
---
---
COM-RX
Channel receive
Input
GND
Ground
---
---
Orderwire Connector
The OW connector is an RJ-45 connector located on the ICP_MCP30 panel
and designated OW. The interface includes a pair of E1 balanced interfaces
connected to an RJ-45 connector on the BG-OW front panel.
the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for the orderwire connector at
both the BG-30B and BG-OW ends, when using the OW cable supplied by ECI
Telecom.
Figure A-9: OW connector, pin identification

Table A-5: OW connector, pin assignment
A-8
Pin (in BG-30B)
Name
Function
Direction
Pin (in BG-OW)
OW_IN(A)
Orderwire input
Input
OW_IN(B)
Input
OW_OUT(A) Orderwire output
Output
OW_OUT(B)
Output
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
V.11 Overhead Connector

The V.11 overhead connector is a 15-pin high-density D-type female connector
on the ICP_MCP30 panel.
The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into
the connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment.
Figure A-10: V.11 connector, pin identification

Table A-6: V.11 overhead connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
V11_RCLK(-)
Receive timing A
To DTE
Brown
V11_TCLK(-)
Transmit timing A
To DTE
Red
V11_RXD(-)
Receive data A
To DTE
Orange
V11_TTCLK(-)
Terminal timing A
From DTE
Yellow
V11_TXD(-)
Transmit data A
From DTE
Green
V11_RCLK(+)
Receive timing B
To DTE
Brown/Gray ring
V11_TCLK(+)
Transmit timing B
To DTE
Red/Gray ring
V11_RXD(+)
Receive data B
To DTE
Orange/Gray ring
V11_TTCLK(+)
Terminal timing B
From DTE
Yellow/Gray ring
10
V11_TXD(+)
Transmit data B
From DTE
Green/Gray ring
11
---
Not connected
---
---
12
---
Not connected
---
---
13
---
Not connected
---
---
14
GND
Ground
---
Blue
15
CGND
Chassis ground
---
Drain wire
(braided)
426006-2333-013-A05
A-9
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Alarms Connector
The Alarms connector, designated ALARMS, is a 15-pin D-type male
connector on the ICP_MCP30 panel providing an alarm interface connecting to
the RAP. The connector supports two groups of lines:
Four external alarm input lines monitored by the BG-30 management

subsystem. Each input is connected to the input diode of an optocoupler.
Three alarm output lines. Each output is provided by a relay dry contact.
Relay contact ratings are 75 V in open the state and 1A in closed state.
The Alarms connector can be connected in one of the following configurations:
Direct connection to a customers alarms collection facilities
Connection to the RAP
ECI Telecom offers appropriate cables for each of these configurations.

the connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment.
Figure A-11: Alarms connector, pin identification

Table A-7: Alarms connector, pin assignment
Pin
A-10
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
ALARM_IN1(A)
First alarm input
Input
Brown
ALARM_IN1(B)
Input
Brown/Gray ring
ALARM_IN2(A)
Input
Red
ALARM_IN2(B)
Input
Red/Gray ring
ALARM_IN3(A)
Input
Orange
ALARM_IN3(A)
Input
Orange/Gray ring
ALARM_IN4(A)
Input
Yellow
ALARM_IN4(B)
Input
Yellow/Gray ring
11
ALARM_OUT1(A)
Output
Blue
12
ALARM_OUT1(B)
Output
Blue/Gray ring
13
ALARM_OUT2(A)
Output
Violet
Second alarm input

Third alarm input
Fourth alarm input
First alarm output
Second alarm output
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Connection Data
Function
Direction
Wire color
Output
Violet/Gray ring
14
ALARM_OUT2(B)
ALARM_OUT3(A)
Third alarm output,

common
Output
Green
10
ALARM_OUT3(B1)
Third alarm output,

normally closed
Output
Green/Gray ring
15
ALARM_OUT3(B2)
Third alarm output,

normally open
Output
White
E1 Connectors on the PME1_21

The PME1_21 provides 21 balanced E1 tributary interfaces through a
SCSI-100 female connector. The SCSI-100 connector serves the 21 E1
receive and transmit signals.
the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for a typical connector. It also
offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Figure A-12: E1 connectors for PME1_21, pin identification

Table A-8: PME1_21 connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
TTIP21
Transmit, tributary 21, wire A
Output
White/Pink ring
TRING21
Transmit, tributary 21, wire B
Output
Light Gray/Pink ring
TTIP20
---
Blue/Pink ring
TRING20
---
Green/Pink ring
TTIP19
Output
Yellow/Pink ring
TRING19
Output
Orange/Pink ring
---
Not connected
---
---
TTIP18
Output
Red/Pink ring
10
TRING18
Output
Brown/Pink ring
11
TTIP17
Output
White/Violet ring
426006-2333-013-A05
A-11
Connection Data
A-12

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
12
TRING17
Output
Light Gray/Violet ring
13
TTIP16
Output
Blue/Violet ring
14
TRING16
Output
Green/Violet ring
15
---
Not connected
---
---
16
TTIP15
Output
Yellow/Violet ring
17
TRING15
Output
Orange/Violet ring
18
TTIP14
Output
Red/Violet ring
19
TRING14
Output
Brown/Violet ring
20
TTIP13
Output
White/Orange ring
21
TRING13
Output
Light Gray/Orange ring
22
---
Not connected
---
---
23
TTIP12
Output
Violet/Orange ring
24
TRING12
Output
Blue/Orange ring
25
TTIP11
Output
Brown/Gray ring
26
TRING11
Output
Brown
27
TTIP10
Output
Red/Gray ring
28
TRING10
Output
Red
29
---
Not connected
---
---
30
TTIP9
Output
Orange/Gray ring
31
TRING9
Output
Orange
32
TTIP8
Output
Yellow/Gray ring
33
TRING8
Output
Yellow
34
TTIP7
Output
Green/Gray ring
35
TRING7
Output
Green
36
---
Not connected
---
---
37
TTIP6
Output
Blue/Gray ring
38
TRING6
Output
Blue
39
TTIP5
Output
Violet/Gray ring
40
TRING5
Output
Violet
41
TTIP4
Output
White/Gray ring
42
TRING4
Output
White
43
---
Not connected
---
---
44
TTIP3
Output
Pink/Gray ring
45
TRING3
Output
Pink
46
TTIP2
Output
Red/White ring
47
TRING2
Output
Brown/White ring
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
48
TTIP1
Output
Yellow/White ring
49
TRING1
Output
Orange/White ring
50
---
Not connected
---
---
51
---
Not connected
---
---
52
RTIP21
Receive, tributary 21, wire A
Input
Green/Orange ring
53
RRING21
Receive, tributary 21, wire B
Input
Yellow/Orange ring
54
RTIP20
Input
Red/Orange ring
55
RRING20
Input
Brown/Orange ring
56
RTIP19
Input
White/Blue ring
57
RRING19
Input
Light Gray/Blue ring
58
---
Not connected
---
---
59
RTIP18
Input
Violet/Blue ring
60
RRING18
Input
Green/Blue ring
61
RTIP17
Input
Yellow/Blue ring
62
RRING17
Input
Orange/Blue ring
63
RTIP16
Input
Red/Blue ring
64
RRING16
Input
Brown/Blue ring
65
---
Not connected
---
---
66
RTIP15
Input
White/Yellow ring
67
RRING15
Input
Light Gray/
Yellow ring
68
RTIP14
Input
Violet/Yellow ring
69
RRING14
Input
Blue/Yellow ring
70
RTIP13
Input
Green/Yellow ring
71
RRING13
Input
Orange/Yellow ring
72
---
Not connected
---
---
73
RTIP12
Input
Red/Yellow ring
74
RRING12
Input
Brown/Yellow ring
75
RTIP11
Input
Blue/White ring
76
RRING11
Input
Green/White ring
77
RTIP10
Input
Light Gray/White ring
78
RRING10
Input
Violet/White ring
79
---
Not connected
---
---
80
RTIP9
Input
Yellow/Brown ring
81
RRING9
Input
Red/Brown ring
82
RTIP8
Input
Green/Brown ring
83
RRING8
Input
Orange/Brown ring
426006-2333-013-A05
A-13
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
84
RTIP7
Input
Violet/Brown ring
85
RRING7
Input
Blue/Brown ring
86
---
Not connected
---
---
87
RTIP6
Input
Pink/Brown ring
88
RRING6
Input
Light Gray/Brown ring
89
RTIP5
Input
Light Gray/Red ring
90
RRING5
Input
Brown/Red ring
91
RTIP4
Input
Green/Red ring
92
RRING4
Input
Yellow/Red ring
93
---
Not connected
---
---
94
RTIP3
Input
Violet/Red ring
95
RRING3
Input
Blue/Red ring
96
RTIP2
Input
Pink/Red ring
97
RRING2
Input
White/Red ring
98
RTIP1
Input
Light Gray/Green ring
99
RRING1
Input
Brown/Green ring
100
---
Not connected
---
---
Braid
---
---
Platfor --m
A-14

Maintenance Manual
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
PME1_63 Connection Data

The PME1_63 provides 63 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has a 272-pin
VHDCI female connector. If unbalanced E1 interfaces (75 ) are required a
conversion patch panel box, like the xDDF-21, is used. The connector has two
parts, each with 136 pins; the upper part serves the 63 E1 receive signals and
the lower part the 63 E1 transmit signals.
ECI Telecom offers a special cable for connecting the PME1_63 (see Traffic
Cable for PME1_63 (page 3-77).) The cable end connecting to the PME1_63
terminates with a double 136-pin VHDCI male connector. The connector parts
are designated as P1 for the transmit lines and P3 for the receive lines.
the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for
unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor and wire B is the
shield or ring). These tables list the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin in the cable offered by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions
Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame. The
cable marking in the heading of each table refers to the 26 AWG cable
connected to the conversion box as designated in the cable description (see
Traffic Cable for PME1_63 (page 3-77)).
Figure A-13: PME1_63 connector pin identification

Table A-9: Connector P1 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable a (red dots on jacket)
--
N/C
--
--
--
N/C
--
--
TXD_P1
Output
Brown
TXD_N1
Output
Brown/Gray
TXD_P2
Output
Red
TXD_N2
Output
Red/Gray
TXD_P3
Output
Orange
TXD_N3
Output
Orange/Gray
TXD_P4
Output
Yellow
10
TXD_N4
Output
Yellow/Gray
11
TXD_P5
Output
Green
12
TXD_N5
Output
Green/Gray
426006-2333-013-A05
A-15
Connection Data
Pin

Maintenance Manual
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable a (red dots on jacket)
A-16
13
TXD_P6
Output
Blue
14
TXD_N6
Output
Blue/Gray
15
TXD_P7
Output
Purple
16
TXD_N7
Output
Purple/Gray
17
TXD_P8
Output
White
18
TXD_N8
Output
White/Gray
19
TXD_P9
Output
Pink
20
TXD_N9
Output
Pink/Gray
21
TXD_P10
Output
Brown/White
22
TXD_N10
Output
Red/White
23
TXD_P11
Output
Orange/White
24
TXD_N11
Output
Yellow/White
25
TXD_P12
Output
Green/White
26
TXD_N12
Output
Blue/White
27
TXD_P13
Output
Purple/White
28
TXD_N13
Output
Light-Gray/White
29
TXD_P14
Output
Red/Brown
30
TXD_N14
Output
Yellow/Brown
31
TXD_P15
Output
Orange/Brown
32
TXD_N15
Output
Green/Brown
33
TXD_P16
Output
Blue/Brown
34
TXD_N16
Output
Purple/Brown
35
--
N/C
--
--
36
--
N/C
--
--
37
TXD_P17
Output
Light-Gray/Brown
38
TXD_N17
Output
Pink/Brown
39
TXD_P18
Output
Brown/Red
40
TXD_N18
Output
Light-Gray/Red
41
TXD_P19
Output
Yellow/Red
42
TXD_N19
Output
Green/Red
43
TXD_P20
Output
Blue/Red
44
TXD_N20
Output
Purple/Red
45
TXD_P21
Output
White/Red
46
TXD_N21
Output
Pink/Red
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Table A-10: Connector P3 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Input
Brown/Yellow
Cable b (red dots on jacket)
91
RXD_N21
92
RXD_P21
Input
Red/Yellow
93
RXD_N20
Input
Orange/Yellow
94
RXD_P20
Input
Green/Yellow
95
RXD_N19
Input
Blue/Yellow
96
RXD_P19
Input
Purple/Yellow
97
RXD_N18
Input
Light-Gray/Yellow
98
RXD_P18
Input
White/Yellow
99
RXD_N17
Input
Brown/Blue
100
RXD_P17
Input
Red/Blue
101
--
N/C
--
--
102
--
N/C
--
--
103
RXD_N16
Input
Orange/Blue
104
RXD_P16
Input
Yellow/Blue
105
RXD_N15
Input
Green/Blue
106
RXD_P15
Input
Purple/Blue
107
RXD_N14
Input
Light-Gray/Blue
108
RXD_P14
Input
White/Blue
109
RXD_N13
Input
Brown/Orange
110
RXD_P13
Input
Red/Orange
111
RXD_N12
Input
Yellow/Orange
112
RXD_P12
Input
Green/Orange
113
RXD_N11
Input
Blue/Orange
114
RXD_P11
Input
Purple/Orange
115
RXD_N10
Input
Light-Gray/Orange
116
RXD_P10
Input
White/Orange
117
RXD_N9
Input
Brown/Purple
118
RXD_P9
Input
Red/Purple
119
RXD_N8
Input
Orange/Purple
120
RXD_P8
Input
Yellow/Purple
121
RXD_N7
Input
Green/Purple
122
RXD_P7
Input
Blue/Purple
123
RXD_N6
Input
Light-Gray/Purple
124
RXD_P6
Input
White/Purple
125
RXD_N5
Input
Brown/Pink
126
RXD_P5
Input
Red/Pink
127
RXD_N4
Input
Orange/Pink
128
RXD_P4
Input
Yellow/Pink
129
RXD_N3
Input
Green/Pink
130
RXD_P3
Input
Blue/Pink
131
RXD_N2
Input
Light-Gray/Pink
426006-2333-013-A05
A-17
Connection Data
Pin

Maintenance Manual
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable b (red dots on jacket)
132
RXD_P2
Input
White/Pink
133
RXD_N1
Input
Pink/Purple
134
RXD_P1
Input
Pink/Yellow
135
--
N/C
--
--
136
--
N/C
--
--

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Output
Brown
Cable c (blue dots on jacket)
A-18
47
TXD_P22
48
TXD_N22
Transmit, tributary22, wire B
Output
Brown/Gray
49
TXD_P23
Output
Red
50
TXD_N23
Output
Red/Gray
51
TXD_P24
Output
Orange
52
TXD_N24
Output
Orange/Gray
53
TXD_P25
Output
Yellow
54
TXD_N25
Output
Yellow/Gray
55
TXD_P26
Output
Green
56
TXD_N26
Output
Green/Gray
57
TXD_P27
Output
Blue
58
TXD_N27
Output
Blue/Gray
59
TXD_P28
Output
Purple
60
TXD_N28
Output
Purple/Gray
61
TXD_P29
Output
White
62
TXD_N29
Output
White/Gray
63
TXD_P30
Output
Pink
64
TXD_N30
Output
Pink/Gray
65
TXD_P31
Output
Brown/White
66
TXD_N31
Output
Red/White
67
--
N/C
--
--
68
--
N/C
--
--
69
--
N/C
--
--
70
--
N/C
--
--
71
TXD_P32
Output
Orange/White
72
TXD_N32
Output
Yellow/White
73
TXD_P33
Output
Green/White
74
TXD_N33
Output
Blue/White
75
TXD_P34
Output
Purple/White
76
TXD_N34
Output
Light-Gray/White
77
TXD_P35
Output
Red/Brown
78
TXD_N35
Output
Yellow/Brown
79
TXD_P36
Output
Orange/Brown
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Connection Data
Direction
Wire color
Cable c (blue dots on jacket)
80
TXD_N36
Output
Green/Brown
81
TXD_P37
Output
Blue/Brown
82
TXD_N37
Output
Purple/Brown
83
TXD_P38
Output
Light-Gray/Brown
84
TXD_N38
Output
Pink/Brown
85
TXD_P39
Output
Brown/Red
86
TXD_N39
Output
Light-Gray/Red
87
TXD_P40
Output
Yellow/Red
88
TXD_N40
Output
Green/Red
89
TXD_P41
Output
Blue/Red
90
TXD_N41
Output
Purple/Red
91
TXD_P42
Output
White/Red
92
TXD_N42
Output
Pink/Red

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Input
Brown/Yellow
Cable d (blue dots on jacket)
45
RXD_N42
46
RXD_P42
Input
Red/Yellow
47
RXD_N41
Input
Orange/Yellow
48
RXD_P41
Input
Green/Yellow
49
RXD_N40
Input
Blue/Yellow
50
RXD_P40
Input
Purple/Yellow
51
RXD_N39
Input
Light-Gray/Yellow
52
RXD_P39
Input
White/Yellow
53
RXD_N38
Input
Brown/Blue
54
RXD_P38
Input
Red/Blue
55
RXD_N37
Input
Orange/Blue
56
RXD_P37
Input
Yellow/Blue
57
RXD_N36
Input
Green/Blue
58
RXD_P36
Input
Purple/Blue
59
RXD_N35
Input
Light-Gray/Blue
60
RXD_P35
Input
White/Blue
61
RXD_N34
Input
Brown/Orange
62
RXD_P34
Input
Red/Orange
63
RXD_N33
Input
Yellow/Orange
64
RXD_P33
Input
Green/Orange
65
RXD_N32
Input
Blue/Orange
66
RXD_P32
Input
Purple/Orange
67
--
N/C
--
--
68
--
N/C
--
--
69
--
N/C
--
--
426006-2333-013-A05
A-19
Connection Data
Pin

Maintenance Manual
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable d (blue dots on jacket)
70
--
N/C
--
--
71
RXD_N31
Input
Light-Gray/Orange
72
RXD_P31
Input
White/Orange
73
RXD_N30
Input
Brown/Purple
74
RXD_P30
Input
Red/Purple
75
RXD_N29
Input
Orange/Purple
76
RXD_P29
Input
Yellow/Purple
77
RXD_N28
Input
Green/Purple
78
RXD_P28
Input
Blue/Purple
79
RXD_N27
Input
Light-Gray/Purple
80
RXD_P27
Input
White/Purple
81
RXD_N26
Input
Brown/Pink
82
RXD_P26
Input
Red/Pink
83
RXD_N25
Input
Orange/Pink
84
RXD_P25
Input
Yellow/Pink
85
RXD_N24
Input
Green/Pink
86
RXD_P24
Input
Blue/Pink
87
RXD_N23
Input
Light-Gray/Pink
88
RXD_P23
Input
White/Pink
89
RXD_N22
Input
Pink/Purple
90
RXD_P22
Input
Pink/Yellow

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Output
Brown
Cable e (yellow dots on jacket)
A-20
93
TXD_P43
94
TXD_N43
Output
Brown/Gray
95
TXD_P44
Output
Red
96
TXD_N44
Output
Red/Gray
97
TXD_P45
Output
Orange
98
TXD_N45
Output
Orange/Gray
99
TXD_P46
Output
Yellow
100
TXD_N46
Output
Yellow/Gray
101
TXD_P47
Output
Green
102
TXD_N47
Output
Green/Gray
103
TXD_P48
Output
Blue
104
TXD_N48
Output
Blue/Gray
105
TXD_P49
Output
Purple
106
TXD_N49
Output
Purple/Gray
107
TXD_P50
Output
White
108
TXD_N50
Output
White/Gray
109
TXD_P51
Output
Pink
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Connection Data
Direction
Wire color
Cable e (yellow dots on jacket)
110
TXD_N51
Output
Pink/Gray
111
TXD_P52
Output
Brown/White
112
TXD_N52
Output
Red/White
113
TXD_P53
Output
Orange/White
114
TXD_N53
Output
Yellow/White
115
TXD_P54
Output
Green/White
116
TXD_N54
Output
Blue/White
117
TXD_P55
Output
Purple/White
118
TXD_N55
Output
Light-Gray/White
119
TXD_P56
Output
Red/Brown
120
TXD_N56
Output
Yellow/Brown
121
TXD_P57
Output
Orange/Brown
122
TXD_N57
Output
Green/Brown
123
TXD_P58
Output
Blue/Brown
124
TXD_N58
Output
Purple/Brown
125
TXD_P59
Output
Light-Gray/Brown
126
TXD_N59
Output
Pink/Brown
127
TXD_P60
Output
Brown/Red
128
TXD_N60
Output
Light-Gray/Red
129
TXD_P61
Output
Yellow/Red
130
TXD_N61
Output
Green/Red
131
TXD_P62
Output
Blue/Red
132
TXD_N62
Output
Purple/Red
133
TXD_P63
Output
White/Red
134
TXD_N63
Output
Pink/Red
135
--
N/C
--
--
136
--
N/C
--
--

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable f (yellow dots on jacket)
--
N/C
--
--
--
N/C
--
--
RXD_N63
Input
Brown/Yellow
RXD_P63
Input
Red/Yellow
RXD_N62
Input
Orange/Yellow
RXD_P62
Input
Green/Yellow
RXD_N61
Input
Blue/Yellow
RXD_P61
Input
Purple/Yellow
RXD_N60
Input
Light-Gray/Yellow
10
RXD_P60
Input
White/Yellow
11
RXD_N59
Input
Brown/Blue
426006-2333-013-A05
A-21
Connection Data
Pin

Maintenance Manual
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable f (yellow dots on jacket)
A-22
12
RXD_P59
Input
Red/Blue
13
RXD_N58
Input
Orange/Blue
14
RXD_P58
Input
Yellow/Blue
15
RXD_N57
Input
Green/Blue
16
RXD_P57
Input
Purple/Blue
17
RXD_N56
Input
Light-Gray/Blue
18
RXD_P56
Input
White/Blue
19
RXD_N55
Input
Brown/Orange
20
RXD_P55
Input
Red/Orange
21
RXD_N54
Input
Yellow/Orange
22
RXD_P54
Input
Green/Orange
23
RXD_N53
Input
Blue/Orange
24
RXD_P53
Input
Purple/Orange
25
RXD_N52
Input
Light-Gray/Orange
26
RXD_P52
Input
White/Orange
27
RXD_N51
Input
Brown/Purple
28
RXD_P51
Input
Red/Purple
29
RXD_N50
Input
Orange/Purple
30
RXD_P50
Input
Yellow/Purple
31
RXD_N49
Input
Green/Purple
32
RXD_P49
Input
Blue/Purple
33
RXD_N48
Input
Light-Gray/Purple
34
RXD_P48
Input
White/Purple
35
RXD_N47
Input
Brown/Pink
36
RXD_P47
Input
Red/Pink
37
RXD_N46
Input
Orange/Pink
38
RXD_P46
Input
Yellow/Pink
39
RXD_N45
Input
Green/Pink
40
RXD_P45
Input
Blue/Pink
41
RXD_N44
Input
Light-Gray/Pink
42
RXD_P44
Input
White/Pink
43
RXD_N43
Input
Pink/Purple
44
RXD_P43
Input
Pink/Yellow
135
--
N/C
--
--
136
--
N/C
--
--
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Ethernet Interface Connectors

The DMFE_4_L1 provides four 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its front
panel. The connectors for the four Ethernet channels are four RJ-45 connectors,
each supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the BG-30B support Auto MDIX.
The figure Ethernet connector, pin identification (page A-3) identifies the
RJ-45 connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table
Ethernet connector, pin assignment (see "MNG Ethernet Connector" page A-3)
lists the pin assignment for a typical connector.
PM345_3 Card Connection Data

The PM345_3 card provides three unbalanced E3/DS-3 tributary interfaces.
The E3/DS-3 connectors are coaxial connectors (6 x DIN 1.0/2.3) on the
PM345_3 front panel.
P345_3E Card Connection Data

The P345_3E card provides three unbalanced E3/DS-3 tributary interfaces. The
E3/DS-3 connectors are coaxial connectors (6 x DIN 1.0/2.3) on the P345_3E
front panel.
PE1_63 Card Connection Data

The PE1_63 provides 63 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has three twin
68-pin VHDCI female connectors. Each twin 68-pin VHDCI connector serves
21 E1 receive and transmit signals.
The PE1_63 uses the same cable as for the PME1_21/PME1_42. The figure E1
connectors for PME1_21, pin identification (page A-11) identifies the E1
connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table PME1_21
connector, pin assignment (see "E1 Connectors on the PME1_21" page A-11)
lists the pin assignment for this connector.
426006-2333-013-A05
A-23
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection

Data
In addition to two GbE interfaces based on SFP modules, the ESW_2G_8F_E
card provides eight 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its front panel. The
connectors for the eight Ethernet channels are eight RJ-45 connectors, each
supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the ESW_2G_8F_E support Auto
MDIX. The figure Ethernet connector, pin identification (page A-3) identifies
the RJ-45 connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection

Data
In addition to two GbE interfaces based on SFP modules, the MPS_2G_8F_
card provides two 10/100/1000BaseT (combo ports) and eight 10/100BaseT
interfaces directly from its front panel. The connectors for the two GbE
Ethernet channels are two RJ-45s, each supporting 10/100/1000BaseT
interfaces. The connectors for the eight Ethernet channels are eight RJ-45
connectors, each supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the MPS_2G_8F support Auto
MDIX. The figure Ethernet connector, pin identification (page A-3) identifies
the RJ-45 connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table
A-24
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
DMGE_1_L1 Connection Data

The DMGE_1_L1 provides one Gigabit Ethernet port (one 1000BaseT through
an RJ45 connector and one SFP slot for an optical interface).
Table A-15: Gigabit Ethernet connector, pin assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
A-TX+
A-Transceiver, + wire
Bidirectional
A-TX-
A-Transceiver, - wire
B-TX+
B-Transceiver, + wire
B-TX-
B-Transceiver, - wire
C-TX+
C-Transceiver, + wire
C-TX-
C-Transceiver, - wire
D-TX+
D-Transceiver, + wire
D-TX-
D-Transceiver, - wire
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
TP21_2 Connection Data

The TP21_2 provides 42 balanced E1 tributary protection interfaces; the card
has five twin 68-pin VHDCI female connectors on its panel. Each VHDCI
connector serves 21 E1 receive and transmit signals. Two connectors serve
42 balanced E1 tributary customer interfaces; two connectors serve 42 balanced
E1 tributary protected interfaces; one connector serves 21 balanced E1 tributary
protecting interfaces.
The following figure identifies the VHDCI connector pins, as seen when
looking into the connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment for a
typical connector and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin
in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector
and a distribution frame.
Figure A-14: E1 connectors for TP21_2, pin identification
426006-2333-013-A05
A-25
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-16: Twin 68-pin VHDCI connector (P2), pin assignment
A-26
P2 pin Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
TTIP11
Output
Brown
TRING11
Transmit, tributary 11 wire B
Output
Brown/Gray ring
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
----
TTIP10
Output
Red
TRING10
Output
Red/Gray ring
TTIP9
Output
Orange
TRING9
Output
Orange/Gray
ring
10
---
Not connected
---
---
11
---
Not connected
---
---
12
TRING8
Output
Yellow
13
TTIP8
Output
Yellow/Gray
ring
14
TTIP7
Output
Green
15
TRING7
Output
Green/Gray ring
16
---
Not connected
---
---
17
---
Not connected
---
---
18
TTIP6
Output
Blue
19
TRING6
Output
Blue/Gray ring
20
TTIP5
Transmit, tributary 5 wire A
Output
Violet
21
TRING5
Output
Violet/Gray ring
22
---
Not connected
---
---
23
---
Not connected
---
---
24
TTIP4
Output
White
25
TRING4
Output
White/Gray ring
26
TTIP3
Output
Pink
27
TRING3
Output
Pink/Gray ring
28
---
Not connected
---
---
29
---
Not connected
---
---
30
TTIP2
Output
Brown/White
ring
31
TRING2
Output
Red/White ring
32
TTIP1
Output
Orange/White
ring
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
P2 pin Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
33
TRING1
Output
Yellow/White
ring
34
---
Not connected
---
---
35
---
Not connected
---
---
36
RTIP11
Input
Green/White ring
37
RRING11
Input
Blue/White ring
38
---
Not connected
---
---
39
---
Not connected
---
---
40
RTIP10
Input
Violet/White
ring
41
RRING10
Input
Light
Gray/White ring
42
RTIP9
Input
Red/Brown ring
43
RRING9
Input
Yellow/Brown
ring
44
---
Not connected
---
---
45
---
Not connected
---
---
46
RRING8
Input
Orange/Brown
ring
47
RTIP8
Input
Green/Brown
ring
48
RRING7
Input
Blue/Brown ring
49
RTIP7
Input
Violet/Brown
ring
50
---
Not connected
---
---
51
---
Not connected
---
---
52
RTIP6
Input
Light
Gray/Brown ring
53
RRING6
Input
Pink/Brown ring
54
RTIP5
Input
Brown/Red ring
55
RRING5
Input
Light Gray/Red
ring
56
---
Not connected
---
---
57
---
Not connected
---
---
58
RTIP4
Input
Yellow/Red ring
59
RRING4
Input
Green/Red ring
60
RTIP3
Input
Blue/Red ring
61
RRING3
Input
Violet/Red ring
62
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2333-013-A05
A-27
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
P2 pin Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
63
---
Not connected
---
---
64
RTIP2
Input
White/Red ring
65
RRING2
Input
Pink/Red ring
66
RTIP1
Input
Brown/Green
ring
67
RRING1
Input
Light
Gray/Green ring
68
---
---
---
BRAID
---
---
Platfor --m
Table A-17: Twin 68-pin VHDCI connector (P1), pin assignment
A-28
P1 pin Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
RRING12
Input
Brown/Yellow
ring
RTIP12
Input
Red/Yellow ring
RRING13
Input
Orange/Yellow
ring
RTIP13
Input
Green/Yellow
ring
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
RRING14
Input
Blue/Yellow ring
RTIP14
Input
Violet/Yellow
ring
10
RTIP15
Input
Light
Gray/Yellow ring
11
RRING15
Input
White/Yellow
ring
12
---
Not connected
---
---
13
---
Not connected
---
---
14
RRING16
Input
Brown/Blue ring
15
RTIP16
Input
Red/Blue ring
16
RRING17
Input
Orange/Blue ring
17
RTIP17
Input
Yellow/Blue ring
18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
---
Not connected
---
---
20
RRING18
Input
Green/Blue ring
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
P1 pin Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
21
RTIP18
Input
Violet/Blue ring
22
RRING19
Input
Light Gray/Blue
ring
23
RTIP19
Input
White/Blue ring
24
---
Not connected
---
---
25
---
Not connected
---
---
26
RRING20
Input
Brown/Orange
ring
27
RTIP20
Input
Red/Orange ring
28
RRING21
Input
Yellow/Orange
ring
29
RTIP21
Input
Green/Orange
ring
30
---
Not connected
---
---
31
---
Not connected
---
---
32
---
Not connected
---
---
33
---
Not connected
---
---
34
---
Not connected
---
---
35
---
Not connected
---
---
36
TRING12
Output
Blue/Orange ring
37
TTIP12
Output
Violet/Orange
ring
38
TRING13
Output
Light
Gray/Orange ring
39
TTIP13
Output
White/Orange
ring
40
---
Not connected
---
---
41
---
Not connected
---
---
42
TRING14
Output
Brown/Violet ring
43
TTIP14
Output
Red/Violet ring
44
TRING15
Output
Orange/Violet
ring
45
TTIP15
Output
Yellow/Violet
ring
46
---
Not connected
---
---
47
---
Not connected
---
---
48
TTIP16
Output
Green/Violet ring
49
TRING16
Output
Blue/Violet ring
426006-2333-013-A05
A-29
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
P1 pin Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
50
TRING17
Output
Light Gray/Violet
ring
51
TTIP17
Output
White/Violet ring
52
---
Not connected
---
---
53
---
Not connected
---
---
54
TRING18
Output
Brown/Pink ring
55
TTIP18
Output
Red/Pink ring
56
TRING19
Output
Orange/Pink ring
57
TTIP19
Output
Yellow/Pink ring
58
---
Not connected
---
---
59
---
Not connected
---
---
60
TRING20
Output
Green/Pink ring
61
TTIP20
Output
Blue/Pink ring
62
TRING21
Output
Light Gray/Pink
ring
63
TTIP21
Output
White/Pink ring
64
---
Not connected
---
---
65
---
Not connected
---
---
66
---
Not connected
---
---
67
---
Not connected
---t
---
68
---
Not connected
---
---
BRAID
---
---
Platfor --m
TP63_1 Connection Data

The TP63_1 provides 63 balanced E1 tributary protection interfaces; this card
has seven twin 68-pin VHDCI female connectors on its panel. Three
connectors serve 63 balanced E1 tributary customer interfaces and four
connectors serve 2 x 63 balanced E1 tributary protected interfaces.
For customer interfaces, the typical connector pin assignment is the same as
TP21_2 Connection Data (page A-25).
A-30
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
TPS1_1 Connection Data

The TPS1_1 provides 4 x STM-1e or 3 x E3/DS-3 protection interfaces; this
card has two DB 8W8P connectors and eight 1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors on its
panel. The eight 1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors serve four customer interfaces. The
two DB 8W8P connectors serve 2 x 4 protected interfaces.
SM_10E Card Connection Data

The SM_10E base card does not have any external interfaces. All external
interfaces are from the front panel of each type of SM_10E traffic module. The
following types of SM_10E traffic module are supported:
SM_FXO_8E
SM_FXS_8E
SM_EM_24W_6E
SM_V24E
SM_CODIR_4E
SM_OMNI_E
SM_EOP
SM_C37.94
Most types of SM_10E traffic module use the same connector for the cabling
of their external traffic interfaces. This connector is a single SCSI-36 female
connector located on the front panel. The following figure identifies the
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-15: SM_10E traffic module connector, pin identification
The following sections contain tables that describe the pin assignment of the
connector for each type of traffic module. These tables include the color of the
wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom
for connecting the SM_10E traffic module connector and a distribution frame.
The SM_EOP has two RJ-45 connectors for connecting to its interfaces and the
SM_C37.94 has two pairs of ST fiber optic connectors for connecting to its
interfaces.
426006-2333-013-A05
A-31
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data for SM_FXO_8E and

SM_FXS_8E Interfaces
The SM_FXO_8E and the SM_FXS_8E each support eight channels. Each
channel has one pair of wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a
typical connector and lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding
pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector
Table A-18: SM_10E SM_FXO_8 and SM_FXS_8 connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
A1
Channel 1, wire A
Bidirectional
Brown
B1
Channel 1, wire B
Bidirectional
Brown/Black
A2
Channel 2, wire A
Bidirectional
Red
B2
Channel 2, wire B
Bidirectional
Red/Black
A3
Channel 3, wire A
Bidirectional
Orange
B3
Channel 3, wire B
Bidirectional
Orange/Black
A4
Channel 4, wire A
Bidirectional
Yellow
B4
Channel 4, wire B
Bidirectional
Yellow/Black
A5
Channel 5, wire A
Bidirectional
Green
10
B5
Channel 5, wire B
Bidirectional
Green/Black
11
A6
Channel 6, wire A
Bidirectional
Blue
12
B6
Channel 6, wire B
Bidirectional
Blue/Black
13
A7
Channel 7, wire A
Bidirectional
Violet
14
B7
Channel 7, wire B
Bidirectional
Violet/Black
15
A8
Channel 8, wire A
Bidirectional
White
16
B8
Channel 8, wire B
Bidirectional
White/Black
NOTE: Only 8 of 18 pairs of wires are used for the

SM_FXO_8E or SM_FXS_8E interfaces.
A-32
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Connection Data for SM_EM_24W6E

Interfaces
The SM_EM_24W6E supports six channels. Each has one pair of wires in 2W
mode, two pairs of wires in 4W or 2W E&M mode, and three pairs of wires in
4W E&M mode. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical
connector and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the
cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Table A-19: SM_10E SM_EM_24W6E connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Mode
Function
Direction
Wire color
RA1
4W
Channel 1, Rx, wire A
Output
Brown
2W
Channel 1, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Channel 1, Rx, wire B
Output
2W
Channel 1, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 2, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 2, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 3, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 3, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 4, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 4, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 5, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 5, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 6, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 6, wire B
Bidirectional
Any
Channel 1, E
Output
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RB1
RA2
RB2
RA3
RB3
RA4
RB4
RA5
RB5
RA6
RB6
E1
426006-2333-013-A05
Brown/Black
Red
Red/Black
Orange
Orange/Black
Yellow
Yellow/Black
Green
Green/Black
Blue
Blue/Black
Violet
A-33
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Mode
Function
Direction
Wire color
14
M1
Any
Channel 1, M
Input
Violet/Black
15
E2
Any
Channel 2, E
Output
White
16
M2
Any
Channel 2, M
Input
White/Black
17
E3
Any
Channel 3, E
Output
Pink
18
M3
Any
Channel 3, M
Input
Pink/Black
19
TA1
4W
Channel 1, Tx, wire A
Input
Brown/White
2W
---
---
4W
Channel 1, Tx, wire B
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
A-34

Maintenance Manual
TB1
TA2
TB2
TA3
TB3
TA4
TB4
TA5
Red/White
Orange/White
Yellow/White
Green/White
Blue/White
Violet/White
Light
Gray/White
Red/Brown
28
TB5
4W
Yellow/Brown
29
TA6
4W
Orange/Brown
30
TB6
4W
Green/Brown
31
E4
Any
Channel 4, E
Output
Blue/Brown
32
M4
Any
Channel 4, M
Input
Violet/Brown
33
E5
Any
Channel 5, E
Output
Light
Gray/Brown
34
M5
Any
Channel 5, M
Input
Pink/Brown
35
E6
Any
Channel 6, E
Output
Brown/Red
36
M6
Any
Channel 6, M
Input
Light Gray/Red
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
NOTE: The number of wires used depends on the mode of

each channel. All 18 pairs of wires are used for the
SM_EM_24W6E module if all channels are in four-wire
E&M mode.
Connection Data for SM_V35E Interfaces

The SM_V35E/SM_V35U_E supports two channels of V.35 interface. Each
channel has 16 wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical
connector and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the
cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Table A-20: SM_10E SM_V35E connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CH1# RD- (104b)
Ch1# receive data -
Output
Brown
CH1# RD+ (104a)
Ch1# receive data +
Output
Brown/Black
CH1# RC- (115b)
Ch1# receive timing -
Output
Red
CH1# RC+ (115a)
Ch1# receive timing +
Output
Red/Black
CH1# TMC- (113b) Ch1# terminal timing -
Input
Orange
CH1# TMC+
(113a)
Ch1# terminal timing +
Input
Orange/Black
CH2# RD- (104b)
Ch2# receive data -
Output
Yellow
CH2# RD+ (104a)
Ch2# receive data +
Output
Yellow/Black
CH2# RC- (115b)
Ch2# receive timing -
Output
Green
10
CH2# RC+ (115a)
Ch2# receive timing +
Output
Green/black
11
CH2# TMC- (113b) Ch2# terminal timing -
Input
Blue
12
CH2# TMC+
(113a)
Ch2# terminal timing +
Input
Blue/Black
13
CH2# CTS (106)
Ch2# clear to send
Output
Violet
14
CH2# DSR (107)
Ch2# data set ready
Output
Violet/Black
15
CH1# DCD(109)
Ch1# data carrier detect
Output
White
16
CH2# DCD(109)
Ch2# data carrier detect
Output
White/Black
17
GND
Signal ground
---
Pink
18
GND
Signal ground
---
Pink/Black
19
CH1# TD- (103b)
Ch1# transmit data -
Input
Brown/White
20
CH1# TD+ (103a)
Ch1# transmit data +
Input
Red/White
21
CH1# TC- (114b)
Ch1# transmit timing -
Output
Orange/White
22
CH1# TC+ (114a)
Ch1# transmit timing +
Output
Yellow/White
426006-2333-013-A05
A-35
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
23
CH1# CTS (106)
Ch1# clear to send
Output
Green/White
24
CH1# DSR (107)
Ch1# data set ready
Output
Blue/White
25
CH2# TD- (103b)
Ch2# transmit data -
Input
Violet/White
26
CH2# TD+ (103a)
Ch2# transmit data +
Input
Light
Gray/White
27
CH2# TC- (114b)
Ch2# transmit timing -
Output
Red/Brown
28
CH2# TC+ (114a)
Ch2# transmit timing +
Output
Yellow/Brown
29
CH1# RTS (105)
Ch1# request to send
Input
Orange/Brown
30
---
---
---
---
31
CH2# RTS (105)
Ch2# request to send
Input
Blue/Brown
32
---
---
---
---
33
CH1# DTR (108)
Ch1# data terminal ready Input
Light
Gray/Brown
34
---
Not connected
---
35
CH2# DTR (108)
Ch2# data terminal ready Input
Brown/Red
36
---
Not connected
---
-----

The SM_V24E module supports the following three modes:
8 x V.24 transparent without control signals
4 x V.24 asynchronous mode with control signals
2 x V.24 synchronous mode with control signals
In 8 x V.24 transparent mode, the SM_V24E supports eight channels, each

with three wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical
connector when the SM_V24E is in 8 x V.24 transparent mode. This table also
offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Table A-21: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 8 x V.24 transparent
without controls mode
A-36
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
13
CH7# SD(103)
Ch7# transmit data
Input
Violet
14
CH7# RD(104)
Ch7# receive data
Output
Violet/Black
15
CH8# SD(103)
Ch8# transmit data
Input
White
16
CH8# RD(104)
Ch8# receive data
Output
White/Black
17
GND
Signal ground
---
Pink
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
18
GND
Signal ground
---
Pink/Black
19
CH1# SD(103)
Ch1# transmit data
Input
Brown/White
20
CH1# RD(104)
Ch1# receive data
Output
Red/White
21
CH2# SD(103)
Ch2# transmit data
Input
Orange/White
22
CH2# RD(104)
Ch2# receive data
Output
Yellow/White
23
CH3# SD(103)
Ch3# transmit data
Input
Green/White
24
CH3# RD(104)
Ch3# receive data
Output
Blue/White
25
CH4# SD(103)
Ch4# transmit data
Input
Violet/White
26
CH4# RD(104)
Ch4# receive data
Output
Light
Gray/White
27
CH5# SD(103)
Ch5# transmit data
Input
Red/Brown
28
CH5# RD(104)
Ch5# receive data
Output
Yellow/Brown
29
CH6# SD(103)
Ch6# transmit data
Input
Orange/Brown
30
CH6# RD(104)
Ch6# receive data
Output
Green/Brown
31
GND
Signal ground
---
Blue/Brown
32
GND
Signal ground
---
Violet/Brown
33
GND
Signal ground
---
Light
Gray/Brown
34
GND
Signal ground
---
Pink/Brown
35
GND
Signal ground
---
Brown/Red
36
GND
Signal ground
---
Light Gray/Red
In mode 4 x V.24 asynchronous with controls, the SM_V24E supports four

channels, each with eight wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for
a typical connector when the SM_V24E is in 4 x V.24 asynchronous with
controls mode. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the
tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Table A-22: SM_V24E connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CH1# RTS(105)
Ch1# require to send
Input
Brown
CH1# CTS(106)
Ch1# clear to send
Output
Brown/Black
CH1# DTR(108) Ch1# data terminal

ready
Input
Red
CH1# DSR(107) Ch1# data set ready
Output
Red/Black
CH1# DCD(109) Ch1# data carrier detect Output
Orange
Orange/Black
CH2# RTS(105)
Yellow
426006-2333-013-A05
Input
A-37
Connection Data
A-38

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CH2# CTS(106)
Ch2# clear to send
Output
Yellow/Black

ready
Input
Green
10
Output
Green/Black
11
Blue
12
Blue/Black
13
CH4# RTS(105)
Input
Violet
14
CH4# CTS(106)
Ch4# clear to send
Output
Violet/Black
15

ready
Input
White
16
Output
White/Black
17
---
Not connected
---
---
18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
CH1# SD(103)
Ch1# transmit data
Input
Brown/White
20
CH1# RD(104)
Ch1# receive data
Output
Red/White
21
CH2# SD(103)
Ch2# transmit data
Input
Orange/White
22
CH2# RD(104)
Ch2# receive data
Output
Yellow/White
23
CH3# SD(103)
Ch3# transmit data
Input
Green/White
24
CH3# RD(104)
Ch3# receive data
Output
Blue/White
25
CH4# SD(103)
Ch4# transmit data
Input
Violet/White
26
CH4# RD(104)
Ch4# receive data
Output
Light
Gray/White
27
CH3# RTS(105)
Input
Red/Brown
28
CH3# CTS(106)
Ch3# clear to send
Output
Yellow/Brown
29
CH3# DTR(108) Ch3# data terminal read Input
Orange/Brown
30
Output
Green/Brown
31
---
Not connected
---
---
32
---
Not connected
---
---
33
SG1
Signal ground
---
Light
Gray/Brown
34
SG2
Signal ground
---
Pink/Brown
35
SG3
Signal ground
---
Brown/Red
36
SG4
Signal ground
---
Light Gray/Red
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
In mode 2 x V.24 synchronous with controls, the SM_V24E supports two

channels, each with eleven wires. The following table lists the pin assignment
for a typical connector when the SM_V24E is in 2 x V.24 synchronous with
controls mode. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
Table A-23: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 2 x V.24
synchronous with controls mode
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CH1# RTS(105)
Input
Brown
CH1# CTS(106)
Ch1# clear to send
Output
Brown/Black
CH1# DTR(108)
Ch1# data terminal

ready
Input
Red
CH1# DSR(107)
Ch1# data set ready
Output
Red/Black
CH1# DCD(109)
Ch1# data carrier

detect
Output
Orange
CH1# RC(115)
Ch1# receive timing
Output
Orange/Black
CH2# RTS(105)
Input
Yellow
CH2# CTS(106)
Ch2# clear to send
Output
Yellow/Black
CH2# DTR(108)
Ch2# data terminal

ready
Input
Green
10
CH2# DSR(107)
Ch2# data set ready
Output
Green/Black
11
CH2# DCD(109)
Ch2# data carrier

detect
Output
Blue
12
CH2# RC(115)
Ch2# receive timing
Output
Blue/Black
13-18 ---
Not connected
---
---
19
CH1# SD(103)
CH1# transmit data
20
CH1# RD(104)
CH1# receive data
Output
Red/White
21
CH2# SD(103)
CH2# transmit data
Input
Orange/White
22
CH2# RD(104)
CH2# receive data
Output
Yellow/White
23
CH1# TMC(113)
Ch1# DTE timing
Input
Green/White
24
CH1# TC(114)
Ch1# transmit timing
Output
Blue/White
25
CH2# TMC(113)
Ch2# DTE timing
Input
Violet/White
26
CH2# TC(114)
Ch2# transmit timing
Output
Light Gray/White
27-34 ---
Not connected
---
---
35
SG1
Signal ground
---
Brown/Red
36
SG2
Signal ground
---
Light Gray/Red
426006-2333-013-A05
Brown/White
A-39
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data for SM_V35_V11 Interfaces

The SM_V35_V11 supports two channels of V.35 or V.11 interface. Each
interface can independently be configured as V.35 or V.11/X.24 and can be
mapped to unframed E1 or N x 64K of framed E1 (the interface rate N is
configurable). The following table lists the pin assignment of V.11 interfaces
for a typical connector and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding
Table A-24: SM_10E SM_V35_V11 connector, pin assignment
A-40
Pin
V.11 signal
Function
Direction
Wire color
20
T(a)
Ch1# transmit data+
Input
Red/White
19
T(b)
Ch1# transmit data-
Input
Brown/White
R(a)
Ch1# receive data+
Output
Brown/Black
R(b)
Ch1# receive data-
Output
Brown
22
S(a)
Ch1# transmit timing+
Output
Yellow/White
21
S(b)
Ch1# transmit timing-
Output
Orange/White
29
C(a)
Ch1# request to send+
Input
Orange/Brown
30
C(b)
Ch1# request to send-
Input
Green/Brown
23
I(a)
Ch1# clear to send+
Output
Green/White
32
I(b)
Ch1# clear to send-
Output
Violate/Brown
17
GND
Ground
---
Pink
26
T(a)
Ch2# transmit data+
Input
Light
Gray/White
25
T(b)
Ch2# transmit data-
Input
Violet/White
R(a)
Ch2# receive data+
Output
Yellow/Black
R(b)
Ch2# receive data-
Output
Yellow
28
S(a)
Ch2# transmit timing+
Output
Yellow/Brown
27
S(b)
Ch2# transmit timing-
Output
Red/Brown
31
C(a)
Ch2# request to send+
Output
Blue/Brown
34
C(b)
Ch2# request to send-
Input
Pink/Brown
13
I(a)
Ch2# clear to send+
Output
Violet
36
I(b)
Ch2# clear to send-
Output
Light Gray/Red
18
GND
Ground
---
Pink/Black
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Connection Data for SM_CODIR_4E

Interfaces
The SM_CODIR_4E supports four channels of codirectional 64 Kbps interface,
each with two pairs of wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a
Table A-25: SM_10E SM_CODIR_4E connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
RA1
Input
Brown
RB1
Input
Brown/Black
RA2
Input
Red
RB2
Input
Red/Black
RA3
Input
Orange
RB3
Input
Orange/Black
RA4
Input
Yellow
RB4
Input
Yellow/Black
9-18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
TA1
Output
Brown/White
20
TB1
Output
Red/White
21
TA2
Output
Orange/White
22
TB2
Output
Yellow/White
23
TA3
Output
Green/White
24
TB3
Output
Blue/White
25
TA4
Output
Violet/White
26
TB4
Output
Light Gray/White
Not connected
---
---
27-36 ---
NOTE: Only 8 of 18 pairs of wires are used for

SM_CODIR_4E interfaces.
426006-2333-013-A05
A-41
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data for SM_OMNI_E Interfaces

The SM_OMNI_E supports four 2W/4W channels, each with one pair of wires
in 2W mode or two pairs of wires in 4W mode. The following table lists the pin
assignment for a typical connector and the color of the wire connected to the
Table A-26: SM_10E SM_OMNI_E connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Mode
Function
Direction
Wire color
RA1
4W
Channel 1, Rx,
wire A
Output
Brown
2W
Channel 1, wire A Bidirectional
4W
Channel 1, Rx,
wire B
2W
Channel 1, wire B Bidirectional
4W
Channel 2, Rx,
wire A
2W
4W
Channel 2, Rx,
wire B
2W
RB1
RA2
RB2
Channel 3, Rx,
wire A
RA3
Output
Output
Output
Output
Brown/Black
Red
Red/Black
Orange

6
RB3
4W
Channel 3, Rx,
wire B
2W

Channel 4, Rx,
wire A
RA4
Output
Output
Orange/Black
Yellow

8
9-18
---
19
TA1
20
A-42
RB4
TB1
4W
Channel 4, Rx,
wire B
2W
Output
Yellow/Black
Not connected
---
---
4W
Channel 1, Tx,
wire A
Input
Brown/White
2W
---
---
4W
Channel 1, Tx,
wire B
Input
Red/White
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Pin
21
22
23
24
25
26
Name
TA2
TB2
TA3
TB3
TA4
TB4
27-36 ---
Connection Data
Mode
Function
Direction
2W
---
---
4W
Channel 2, Tx,
wire A
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Channel 2, Tx,
wire B
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Channel 3, Tx,
wire A
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Channel 3, Tx,
wire B
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Channel 4, Tx,
wire A
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Channel 4, Tx,
wire B
Input
2W
---
---
Not connected
---
Wire color
Orange/White
Yellow/White
Green/White
Blue/White
Violet/White
Light
Gray/White
---
NOTE: Only 8 of 18 pairs of wires are used for

SM_OMNI_E interfaces
426006-2333-013-A05
A-43
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
ICP_VF Connection Data

A single ICP_VF can serve one of the following SM_10E modules:
SM_FXS_8E
SM_FXO_8E
SM_EM_24W6E (Connectors marked CH7 and CH8 are not connected.)
SM_Codir_4_E (Connectors marked CH5 to CH8 are not connected.)
There are eight RJ-45 connectors for external interfaces on the front panel of
the ICP_VF. The figure Ethernet connector, pin identification (page A-3)
identifies the RJ-45 connector pins as seen when looking into the connector.
The following tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector, when
serving each type of traffic module. These tables also list the color of the wire
connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for
connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Table A-27: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_FXS_8E or
SM_FXO_8E
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Line A
Wire A
Bidirectional
Blue/White ring
Line B
Wire B
Bidirectional
White/Blue ring
4-8
---
Not connected
---
---
Table A-28: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_EM_24W6E
Pin
Name
Mode
Function
RA1
4W
Channel 1, Rx, wire A Output
2W
Channel 1, wire A
4W
Channel 1, Rx, wire B Output
2W
Channel 1, wire B
4W
Channel 1, Tx, wire A Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
2
3
4
A-44
RB1
TA1
TB1
Direction
Wire color
Blue/White ring
Bidirectional
White/blue ring
Bidirectional
Green/White ring
White/Green ring
---
---
---
---
Brown/White ring
---
---
---
---
White/Brown ring
E1
Any
Channel 1, E
Output
Orange/White ring
M1
Any
Channel 1, M
Input
White/Orange ring
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Table A-29: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_CODIR_4E
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
RA
Rx, wire A
Input
Blue/White ring
RB
Rx, wire B
Input
White/Blue ring
TA
Tx, wire A
Output
Green/White ring
TB
Tx, wire B
Output
White/Green ring
ICP_V24 Connection Data

V.24 interfaces in the SM_V24E are always in DCE mode. One ICP_V24 can
serve one SM_V24E module. The SM_V24E module can work in the
following three modes:
Eight channels of transparent without controls mode (Connectors marked

SYNC CH1 and SYNC CH2 are not connected.)
Four channels of asynchronous with controls mode (Connectors marked

SYNC CH1 and SYNC CH2 and CH5 to CH8 are not connected.)
Two channels of synchronous with controls mode (Connectors marked

CH1 to CH8 are not connected.)
Two types of connectors for external interfaces are on the front panel of the
ICP_V24:
25-pin D-type male connector for synchronous V.24 interfaces
9-pin D-type male connector for transparent or asynchronous V.24

interfaces
The following figure identifies the 25-pin D-type male connector pins as seen
when looking into the connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment
Figure A-16: 25-pin D-type male connector, pin identification
426006-2333-013-A05
A-45
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-30: ICP_V24 synchronous V.24 25-pin D-type connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
SD (103)
Transmit data
Input
Brown
RD (104)
Receive data
Output
Brown/Gray ring
RTS (105)
Request to send
Input
Red
CTS (106)
Clear to send
Output
Red/Gray ring
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange
GND
Signal ground
---
Orange/Gray ring
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow
---
Not connected
---
---
10
---
Not connected
---
---
11
---
Not connected
---
---
12
---
Not connected
---
---
13
---
Not connected
---
---
14
---
Not connected
---
---
15
TC (114)
Transmit timing
---
---
16
---
Not connected
---
---
17
RC (115)
Receive timing
---
---
18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
---
Not connected
---
---
20
DTR(108)
Data terminal ready Input
Green/Gray ring
21
---
Not connected
---
---
22
---
Not connected
---
---
23
---
Not connected
---
---
24
TMC (113)
DTE timing
Input
Blue
25
---
Not connected
---
---
when looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical
connector in modes asynchronous with controls and transparent without
controls. These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the
A-46
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Table A-31: ICP_V24 asynchronous V.24 9-pin D-type connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Blue/White ring
SD (103)
Transmit data
Input
White/Blue ring
RD (104)
Receive data
Output
Orange/White ring
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
White/Orange ring
GND
Signal ground
---
White/Green ring
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Green/White ring
CTS (106)
Clear to send
Output
Brown/White ring
RTS (105)
Request to send
Input
White/Brown ring
---
Not connected
---
---
Table A-32: ICP_V24 transparent V.24 9-pin D-type connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
SD (103)
Transmit data
Input
Brown
RD (104)
Receive data
Output
Brown/Black
---
Not connected
---
---
GND
Receive data
---
Red
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2333-013-A05
A-47
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
ICP_V35 Connection Data

V.35 interfaces in the SM_V35E are always in DCE mode. One ICP_V35 can
serve a single SM_V35E module. Two M34 female connectors for external
interfaces are on the front panel of the ICP_V35.
The following figure identifies the M34 female connector pins as seen when
looking into the connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment for a
Figure A-18: M34 female connector, pin identification

Table A-33: ICP_V35 M34 female connector, pin assignment
A-48
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND (101) Case ground
---
Brown
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Brown/Gray ring
RTS (105)
Request to send
Input
Red
CTS (106)
Clear to send
Output
Red/Gray ring
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Orange/Gray ring
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
Yellow
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data +
Input
Green
TD- (103b)
Transmit data -
Input
Green/Gray ring
RD+ (104a)
Receive data +
Output
Blue
RD- (104b)
Receive data -
Output
Blue/Gray ring
TMC+ (113a) Terminal clock +
Input
Violet
TMC- (113b) Terminal clock -
Input
Violet/Gray ring
RC+ (115a)
Receive clock +
Output
White
RC- (115b)
Receive clock -
Output
White/Gray ring
TC+ (114a)
Transmit clock +
Output
Pink
AA
TC- (114b)
Transmit clock -
Output
Pink/Gray ring
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
ICP_V11_V24 Connection Data

One ICP_V11_V24 can serve one SM_V35_V11 module. Two DB15 female
connectors and two DB25 male connectors make up two channels for external
interfaces on the front panel of the ICP_V11_V24. Each channel has one DB15
female connector and one DB25 male connector.
The following figure identifies the 15-pin D-type female connector pins as seen
pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom.
Figure A-19: 15-pin D-type female connector, pin identification

Table A-34: ICP_V11_V24 15-pin D-type connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Case ground
---
---
T+
Transmit data+
Input
Brown
C+
Request to send+
Input
Orange
R+
Receive data+
Output
White
I+
Clear to send+
Output
Yellow
S+
Transmit timing+
Output
Red
---
Not connected
---
---
Ground
Signal GND
---
Green
T-
Transmit data-
Input
Brown/Gray Loop
10
C-
Request to send-
Input
Orange/Gray Loop
11
R-
Receive data-
Output
White/Gray Loop
12
I-
Clear to send-
Output
Yellow/Gray Loop
13
S-
Transmit timing-
Output
Red/Gray Loop
14
---
Not connected
---
---
15
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2333-013-A05
A-49
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-35: ICP_V11_V24 V.24 25-pin D-type connector, pin assignment
A-50
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
SD (103)
Transmit data
Input
Brown
RD (104)
Receive data
Output
Brown/Gray ring
RTS (105)
Request to send
Input
Red
CTS (106)
Clear to send
Output
Red/Gray ring
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange
GND
Signal ground
---
Orange/Gray ring
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow
---
Not connected
---
---
10
---
Not connected
---
---
11
---
Not connected
---
---
12
---
Not connected
---
---
13
---
Not connected
---
---
14
---
Not connected
---
---
15
TC (114)
Transmit timing
---
---
16
---
Not connected
---
---
17
RC (115)
Receive timing
---
---
18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
---
Not connected
---
---
20
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready Input
Green/Gray ring
21
---
Not connected
---
---
22
---
Not connected
---
---
23
---
Not connected
---
---
24
TMC (113)
DTE timing
Input
Blue
25
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
ICP_DB37D Connection Data

One ICP_DB37D can serve one SM_V35_V11 module. Two DB37 female
connectors for external interfaces are on the front panel of the ICP_DB37D.
Connector pin-out is defined for the following six types of interfaces:
RS449
RS422
V.36
V.35
V.11/X.24
Synchronous V.24
The following figure identifies the 37-pin D-type female connector pins as seen
Figure A-21: 37-pin D-type female connector, pin identification
Table A-36: ICP_DB37D 37 pin D-type connector, pin assignment

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Case ground
---
Black
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
TC+ (114a)
Transmit timing+
Output
Brown
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
RTS_O+ (105a)
Request to send+
Input
Red
RC+ (115a)
Receive timing+
Input
Red/White
CTS_O+
Clear to send+
Output
Orange
10
---
Not connected
---
---
11
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange/White
12
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
Yellow
13
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow/Black
14
---
Not connected
---
---
15
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2333-013-A05
A-51
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
16
---
Not connected
---
---
17
TMC+ (113a)
Terminal timing+
---
Green
18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
20
---
Not connected
---
---
21
---
Not connected
---
---
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
23
TC- (114b)
Transmit timing-
Output
Blue/White
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
25
RTS_O- (105b)
Request to send-
Input
Purple/White
26
RC- (115b)
Receive timing-
Input
Gray
27
CTS- (106b)
Clear to send-
Output
Gray/Black
28
---
Not connected
---
---
29
---
Not connected
---
---
30
---
Not connected
---
---
31
---
Not connected
---
---
32
---
Not connected
---
---
33
---
Not connected
---
---
34
---
Not connected
---
---
35
TMC- (113b)
Terminal timing-
Output
White
36
---
Not connected
---
---
37
---
Not connected
---
---
Table A-37: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, RS-449 pin assignment
A-52
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Table A-38: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, RS-422 pin assignment

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
Table A-39: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.36 pin assignment

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Case ground
---
Black
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
TC+ (114a)
Transmit timing+
Output
Brown
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
RTS_O+ (105a)
Request to send+
Input
Red
RC+ (115a)
Receive timing+
Input
Red/White
CTS_O+
Clear to send+
Output
Orange
11
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange/White
12
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
Yellow
13
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow/Black
17
TMC+ (113a)
Terminal timing+
---
Green
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
23
TC- (114b)
Transmit timing-
Output
Blue/White
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
26
RC- (115b)
Receive timing-
Input
Gray
35
TMC- (113b)
Terminal timing-
Output
White
426006-2333-013-A05
A-53
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-40: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.35 pin assignment

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Case ground
---
Black
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
TC+ (114a)
Transmit timing+
Output
Brown
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
RTS_O+ (105a)
Request to send+
Input
Red
RC+ (115a)
Receive timing+
Input
Red/White
CTS_O+
Clear to send+
Output
Orange
11
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange/White
12
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
Yellow
13
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow/Black
17
TMC+ (113a)
Terminal timing+
---
Green
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
23
TC- (114b)
Transmit timing-
Output
Blue/White
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
26
RC- (115b)
Receive timing-
Input
Gray
35
TMC- (113b)
Terminal timing-
Output
White
Table A-41: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.11/X.24 pin assignment
A-54
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Case ground
---
Black
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
TC+ (114a)
Transmit timing+
Output
Brown
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
RTS_O+ (105a)
Request to send+
Input
Red
CTS_O+
Clear to send+
Output
Orange
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
23
TC- (114b)
Transmit timing-
Output
Blue/White
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
25
RTS_O- (105b)
Request to send-
Input
Purple/White
27
CTS- (106b)
Clear to send-
Output
Gray/Black
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Table A-42: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, synchronous V.24 pin

assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
TC+ (114a)
Transmit timing+
Output
Brown
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
RTS_O+ (105a)
Request to send+
Input
Red
RC+ (115a)
Receive timing+
Input
Red/White
CTS_O+
Clear to send+
Output
Orange
11
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange/White
12
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
Yellow
13
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow/Black
17
TMC+ (113a)
Terminal timing+
---
Green
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
RAP-4B Connectors
SHELF ALARM Connectors
The four ALARM connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors that can each
be connected to the ALARMS connector of an XDM, BG, or 9600 series
platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen when
looking into the connector).
Figure A-22: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector, pin identification

Table A-43: RAP-4B PLATFORM ALARM connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
N/C
--
--
ALM_IP1
Alarm input 1, + wire
Input
ALM_IN1
Alarm input 1, - wire
Input
ALM_IP2
Input
ALM_IN2
Input
ALM_IP3
Input
ALM_IN3
Input
426006-2333-013-A05
A-55
Connection Data
A-56

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
ALM_IP4
Input
ALM_IN4
Input
10
N/C
--
--
11
N/C
--
--
12
GND
Ground
--
13
ALM_O1
Alarm output 1 common
Output
14
N/C
--
--
15
GND
Ground
--
16
ALM_O2
Alarm output 2 common
Output
17
N/C
--
--
18
BUZ_COM
Buzzer common
Input
19
N/C
--
--
20
GND
Ground
--
21
CRIT_COM
Critical alarm common
--
22
N/C
--
--
23
MAJ_COM
Major alarm common
Input
24
GND
Ground
--
25
N/C
--
--
26
GND
Ground
--
27
MIN_COM
Minor alarm common
Input
28
N/C
--
--
29
WARN_COM
Warning alarm common
--
30
GND
Ground
--
31
N/C
--
--
32
N/C
--
--
33
N/C
--
--
34
N/C
--
--
35
GND
Ground
--
36
N/C
--
--
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
ALARM IN/OUT Connector

The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries
three groups of lines to the customer equipment:
Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the

BroadGate platforms. Four inputs are allocated to each one. Each input is
activated by closing a dry contact provided from the customer's facility.
Eight sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform

ground, that serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight
relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each BroadGate platform
connected to the RAP-4B.
Four sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform

ground, that serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays,
identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the
corresponding alarm relays of BroadGate platforms.
Relay contact ratings are 72 V in open state and 1A in closed state.

The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen
when looking into the connector.
Figure A-23: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin identification

Table A-44: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin assignment
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Platform 1
ALM_01NO
Output relay 1, normally open Output

contact
Black
ALM_01COM
Output relay 1, common

contact
Output
Brown
ALM_01NC
Output relay 1, normally

closed contact
Output
Red
ALM_02NO

contact
Orange
ALM_02COM

contact
Output
Yellow
ALM_02NC

closed contact
Output
Green
426006-2333-013-A05
Direction
Wire color
A-57
Connection Data
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Platform 2
ALM_03NO

contact
Blue
ALM_03COM

contact
Output
Violet
ALM_03NC

closed contact
Output
Gray
10
ALM_04NO

contact
White
11
ALM_04COM

contact
Output
Pink
12
ALM_04NC

closed contact
Output
Light Green
13
ALM_05NO

contact
Black/White
14
ALM_05COM

contact
Output
Brown/White
15
ALM_05NC

closed contact
Output
Red/White
16
ALM_06NO

contact
Orange/White
17
ALM_06COM

contact
Output
Green/White
18
ALM_06NC

closed contact
Output
Blue/White
19
ALM_07NO

contact
Violet/White
20
ALM_07COM

contact
Output
Red/Black
21
ALM_07NC

closed contact
Output
Orange/Black
22
ALM_08NO

contact
Yellow/Black
23
ALM_08COM

contact
Output
Green/Black
24
ALM_08NC

closed contact
Output
Gray/Black
Platform 3
Platform 4
A-58

Maintenance Manual
Direction
Wire color
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
Wire color
All platforms
25
CRIT_NC
Critical alarm relay, normally

closed contact
Output
Pink/Black
26
CRIT_NO
Critical alarm relay, normally

open contact
Output
Pink/Green
27
CRIT_COM
Critical alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Pink/Red
28
MAJ_NC
Major alarm relay, normally

closed contact
Output
Pink/Violet
29
MAJ_NO
Major alarm relay, normally

open contact
Output
Light Blue
30
MAJ_COM
Major alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Light Blue/Brown
31
MIN_NC
Minor alarm relay, normally

closed contact
Output
Light Blue/Red
32
MIN_NO
Minor alarm relay, normally

open contact
Output
Light Blue/Violet
33
MIN_COM
Minor alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Light Blue/Black
34
WARN_COM
Warning alarm relay,

common contact
Output
Gray/Green
35
ALMIN1
External alarm input 1
Input
Gray/Red
36
ALM_IN1
Input
Gray/Violet
37
ALMIN2
Input
Light Green/Black
38
ALM_IN2
Input
Violet/Black
39
ALMIN3
Input
Black/White dots
40
ALM_IN3
Input
Brown/White dots
41
ALMIN4
Input
Red/White dots
42
ALM_IN4
Input
Orange/White dots
43
ALMIN5
Input
Green/White dots
44
ALM_IN5
Input
Blue/White dots
45
ALMIN6
Input
Violet/White dots
46
ALM_IN6
Input
White/Black dots
47
ALMIN7
Input
Yellow/Black dots
48
ALM_IN7
Input
Green/Black dots
49
ALMIN8
Input
Light Blue/Black
dots
50
ALM_IN8
Input
Pink/Black dots
Platform 1
Platform 2
426006-2333-013-A05
A-59
Connection Data
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
Wire color
Platform 3
51
ALMIN9
Input
Red/Black dots
52
ALM_IN9
Input
Orange/Black dots
53
ALMIN10
Input
Violet/Black dots
54
ALM_IN10
Input
Gray/Black dots
55
ALMIN11
Input
56
ALM_IN11
Input
Orange/Red dots
57
ALMIN12
Input
Yellow/Red dots
58
ALM_IN12
Input
Green/Red dots
59
ALMIN13
Input
Violet/Red dots
60
ALM_IN13
Input
Gray/Red dots
61
ALMIN14
Input
White/Red dots
62
ALM_IN14
Input
Pink/Red dots
63
ALMIN15
Input
Yellow/White
64
ALM_IN15
Input
Gray/White
65
ALMIN16
Input
Pink/White
66
ALM_IN16
Input
Brown/Black
67
WARN_NC

normally closed contact
Output
Blue/Black
68
WARN_NO

normally open contact
Output
Gray/White dots
Platform 4
All platforms
A-60

Maintenance Manual
426006-2333-013-A05
B
Rack Installation
In this appendix:
Installing Equipment Racks ............................................................................ B-1
Installing 19" Racks ........................................................................................ B-6
Installing Equipment Racks

NOTE: The instructions in this Appendix are relevant to the
installation of all rack types. However, it is recommended that
BG-30 platforms be installed in ETSI A racks.
Marking Rack Floor

You need to mark out the rack floor plan before installing the rack.
Before you start:
Before starting, find the prescribed location of each equipment rack.
If you have not yet unpacked the rack and the associated mounting kits, do so
now (see Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection (page 3-5)).
426006-2333-013-A05
B-1
Rack Installation

Maintenance Manual
To mark out the rack floor plan:

1. For each rack, mark out the floor at the rack location(s) according to the
floor plan template corresponding to the type of rack being installed:
ETSI A and ETSI B racks: Use template of diagram a. in the figure

"Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden
Floors (page B-3)).
23 rack: Use template of diagram a. in the figure "Mounting diagrams

for 19 and 23 racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (page B3)).
19 rack: Use template of diagram b. in the figure "Mounting diagrams

for 19 and 23 racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (page B3)).
The marked locations are a helpful guide for positioning the racks.
2. If the installation is located at a site with a floating (suspended) floor, also
mark out all cable entry slots.
3. For concrete or wooden floors, mark out all the points designated for
equipment bolting.
Installing the Rack on Concrete Floors

To install the rack on a concrete floor:
1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template. See diagram a. in the figure "Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks",
and diagram a. or b. in the figure "Mounting diagrams for 19 and 23
racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (see "Installing the Rack on
Wooden Floors" page B-3)).
2. Insert expansion shields into the holes.
3. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
4. Secure the rack to the floor with the bolts supplied in the mounting kit, in
accordance with diagram b. or diagram c. in the figure "Mounting diagrams
for 19 and 23 racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (see "Installing
the Rack on Wooden Floors" page B-3)).
B-2
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Rack Installation
Installing the Rack on Wooden Floors

To install the rack on a wooden floor:
1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template (see the following figures), using a 5 mm drill bit.
3. Secure the rack to the floor using the appropriate wood screws (see the
following figures).
Figure B-1: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks
426006-2333-013-A05
B-3
Rack Installation

Maintenance Manual
Figure B-2: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks
Installing the Rack on Floating (Suspended)

Floors
To install the rack on a floating (suspended) floor:
1. Drill the required mounting holes in the suspended floor, in accordance
with the appropriate template.
3. Secure the rack to the floor in accordance with diagram c. in the figure
"Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors
(page B-3)).
B-4
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Rack Installation
Installing the Rack on Suspended Overhead

Trays
To install the rack on a suspended overhead tray:
1. See the following figure and position the overhead rack securing brackets.
2. Secure the rack to the overhead cabling trays, using the adjustable brackets.
2200 mm high racks may also be attached to the ceiling; 2600 mm racks
are generally attached only to the ceiling.
Figure B-3: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead

tray (2200 mm rack)
Installing Extendable Rails

In high-density installations, it may be necessary to install the xRAP above the
rack using the extendable installation rails available from ECI Telecom.
In this case, attach the extendable installation rails to the top of the rack before
installing the equipment.
Grounding the Rack

Immediately after installing the rack, connect its grounding stud to the
prescribed grounding point on the site grounding bar.
Use a grounding lead that meets the requirements described in Rack Grounding
Requirements (page 2-17).
426006-2333-013-A05
B-5
Rack Installation

Maintenance Manual
Installing 19" Racks

The BG-30 can also be installed in European 19 racks. This is accepted under
the limitations that the racks general dimensions are according to the
following figure. Any other European 19 rack must first be examined and
approved by ECI Telecom.
Figure B-4: Example of an approved European 19 rack
B-6
426006-2333-013-A05
Index
Attaching the Support Rails 4-7
Attaching the Transparent Protection
Cover 4-47
Attaching the Wall-Mounted Frame
4-37
Auxiliary Connector on the MCP30 A-5
2
2 Mbps test 5-5
34 Mbps test 5-5
4
45 Mbps test 5-5
A
About This Manual xiii
AC_CONV_30B
connection data A-2
AC_CONV_30B/AC_CONV_30E AC
Input Power Connectors A-2
AC_CONV_30E
connection data A-2
AC_CONV_MODULE
installing 3-45
AC_CONV_UNIT
installing 3-45
Alarm Cables 2-11
connecting 3-73
ALARM IN/OUT Connector A-57
Alarm-Handling Test 5-10, 5-13
Alarms
connection data A-10
Alarms Connector A-10
Ancillary Units 3-8
Assembling the DDF 4-14
Attaching Cable Clamping Bars 4-11
Attaching Connection Blocks 4-15
Attaching the BG-30B Platform in the
Rack 3-32
Attaching the BG-30E Platform in the
Rack 3-52
Attaching the EXT-2U Shelf to the Rack
3-65
Attaching the Fiber Guide Tube 4-11,
4-36
426006-2333-013-A05
Before You Start 2-1

BG-30
commissioning tests 5-1
connecting electrical interface cables
3-75
connecting fibers nd cables 3-73
connection data A-1
data network commissioning tests
5-11
environmental requirements 2-4
equipment installation 3-1
getting started 2-1
getting started overview 2-1
installation 2-6, 3-1
installation options 3-6
installation overview 2-1
installation plan 2-6
installation sequence 3-2
integrating with other equipment in
one rack 2-8
introduction 1-1
maintenance overview 6-1
physical location 2-4
platform overview 1-1
power cables 2-10
power sources 2-5
SDH commissioning tests 5-5
site commisssioning tests 5-2
site preparation 2-4
typical installation 2-7
I-1
Index

Maintenance Manual
unpacking 3-5
visual inspection 3-5
BG-30 Platform Overview 1-1
BG-30B
attaching in rack 3-32
grounding 3-33
installing 3-31
installing FCU_30B 3-36
installing power modules 3-35
installing Tslot modules 3-44
installing XIO30 3-43
slot identification 3-33
BG-30B Wall-Mounted Installations 4-1
BG-30E
attaching to rack 3-52
installing 3-47
installing extension cards 3-56
installing FCU_30E 3-55
installing on BG-30B shelf 3-49
installing power modules 3-54
BGW-E
Attaching in a Rack 3-65
Disassembling from BG-30B 3-63
Extension Cards in the EXT-2U-E
3-69
FCU_WE in the EXT-2U-E 3-68
Identifying Slots 3-65
Installing in Rack 3-61
Installing on BG-30B 3-61
Installing the H connector 3-62
TP63_1 Cards in the EXT-2U-E
3-70
C
Cables 2-9
alarm 2-11
coaxial 3-80
connecting to BG-30 3-73
data interface 3-90
DC power 2-10
electric traffic 2-12
electrical 3-75
I-2
grounding 2-10
management 2-11
RAP input power 2-10
shelf power 2-11
timing 2-12
Checking
cards installed 5-2
modules installed 5-2
Checking Cards and Modules Installed in
Each Shelf 5-2
Checking DC Voltage Polarity 3-22
Cleaning Optical Connectors 2-6
Commissioning Tests 5-1
Connecting
alarm cables 3-73
coaxial cables 3-80
data interface cables to Ethernet
interfaces 3-90
E1 cables for balanced E1 interfaces
3-75
E1 cables for unbalanced E1
interfaces 3-76
electrical cables 3-90
electrical interface cables 3-75
fibers 3-73
optical fibers 3-74
optical modules 3-74
power cables 3-73
timing cables 3-91
Connecting Alarm Cables 4-27, 4-50
Connecting Cabinet Grounding 4-23
Connecting Customer Cables 4-16
Connecting Equipment Cables 4-16
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the
BG-30 Shelf 3-73
Connecting I/O Protection Cables in the
BG-30 3-81
Connecting Management Cables 4-30,
4-53
Connecting Optical Fibers 4-27, 4-50
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical
Modules 3-74
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Power and Alarm Cables to a

DC Power Source 3-73
Connecting Power Cables 4-25, 4-49
Connecting the Timing (Clock) Cable
3-91
Connecting the TP21_2 3-87
Connecting the TP63_1 3-88
Connecting the TPS1_1 3-89
4-30, 4-52
Connecting Wall-Mounted Frame
Grounding 4-47
Connection Data A-1
alarms A-10
auxiliary connector on MCP30 A-5
ESW_2G_8F_E A-24
Ethernet A-23
ICP_V24 A-45
ICP_V35 A-48
ICP_VF A-44
INF_30B A-2
INF_30E A-2
MNG Ethernet A-3
MPS_2G_8F A-24
orderwire A-8
overview A-2
P345_3E A-23
PE1_63 A-23
PM345_3 A-23
PME1_21 A-11
RS-232 A-7
SM_10E A-31
SM_CODIR_4E A-41
SM_EM_24W6E A-33
SM_FXO_8E A-32
SM_FXS_8E A-32
SM_V24E A-36
SM_V35E A-35
T3/T4 A-4
V.11 overhead A-9
426006-2333-013-A05
Index
Connection Data for SM_CODIR_4E

Interfaces A-41
Connection Data for SM_EM_24W6E
Interfaces A-33
Connection Data for SM_FXO_8E and
SM_FXS_8E Interfaces A-32
Connection Data for SM_OMNI_E
Interfaces A-42
A-36
Connection Data for SM_V35_V11
Interfaces A-40
A-35
D
Data Network Commissioning Tests
5-11
DC
power cables 2-10
DC Power Cables 2-10
DDF 21 E1s Unit 4-13
Disassembling the BG-30E from the
BG-30B 3-50
Disassembling the EXT-2U from the
BG-30B 3-63
DMGE_1_L1 Connection Data A-25
Document Conventions xiv
Document Organization xiii
E
E1 Connectors on the PME1_21 A-11
Electric Traffic Cables 2-12
ElectricTraffic Cables 2-12
Environmental Requirements 2-4
Environmental Requirements 2-4
Equipment
safety 2-16
Equipment Installation 3-1
Equipment Power-on Test 5-8
Equipment Power-On Test 5-8
ESD Protection 2-22
I-3
Index

Maintenance Manual
Eslot
replacing 6-28
ESW_2G_8F_E
installing SFP modules 3-59
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data
A-24
Ethernet Interface Connectors A-23
Ethernet Interfaces 3-90
Extension Cards 3-56
F
FCU_30B/FCU_30BH
installing 3-36
replacing 6-30
FCU_30E
installing 3-55
replacing 6-30
Fiber Storage Tray
installing 3-22
Fibers 2-9
connecting to BG-30 3-73
optical 2-14
Frame Loss Rate Test 5-12
Frame Loss-Rate 5-12
G
Grounding
BG-30B 3-33
cables 2-10
rack B-5
rack requirements 2-17
requirements 2-17
Grounding Cables 2-10
Grounding Requirements 2-17
Grounding the BG-30B Platform 3-33
Grounding the Rack B-5
H
H connector
installing 3-48
I-4
I
ICP_DB37D Connection Data A-51
ICP_MCP30
installing 3-28
replacing 6-30
ICP_V11_V24 Connection Data A-49
ICP_V24
ICP_V24 Connection Data A-45
ICP_V35
ICP_V35 Connection Data A-48
ICP_VF
ICP_VF Connection Data A-44
ICPs
replacing 6-29
Identifying Slots in the BG-30B 3-33
Identifying Slots in the BG-30E 3-52
Identifying Slots in the EXT-2U 3-65
INF_30B
connection data A-2
INF_30B/INF_30BH/INF_30E DC Input
Power Connectors A-2
INF_30E
connection data A-2
Input Sensitivity Test 5-7
Installation 2-6
AC_CONV_MODULE 3-45
AC_CONV_UNIT 3-30
ancillary units in racks 3-8
BG-30 in racks 2-6
BG-30B 3-31
BG-30B power modules 3-35
BG-30E 3-47
BG-30E on BG-30B shelf 3-49
BG-30E power modules 3-54
extendable rails on rack B-5
extension cards in BG-30E 3-56
Extension Cards in the EXT-2U-E
3-69
FCU_30B/FCU_30BH 3-36
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
FCU_30E 3-55
FCU_WE in the EXT-2U-E 3-68
fiber storage tray 3-22
H connector 3-48
H Connector 3-62
MCP30 3-37
ODF 3-24
options 3-6
overview 2-1
plan 2-6
Power Modules in the EXT-2U-E
3-67
preliminary preparations 3-2
rack B-1
rail stiffeners 3-31
RAP-BG 3-9
sequence 3-2
SFP module 3-46
SFP module in ESW_2G_8F_E
3-59
TP63_1 Cards in the EXT-2U-E
3-70
traffic modules on SM_10E 3-60
Tslot modules 3-44
typical BG-30 2-7
xDDF-21 3-27
XIO30 3-43
Installation Options 3-6
Installation Plan 2-6
Installation Sequence 3-2
Installing 19 B-6
Installing a Power Module in the BG-30B
3-35
Installing a Power Module in the EXT-2U
3-67
Installing an AC_CONV_MODULE in
the AC_CONV_UNIT 3-45
Installing an FCU_30B or FCU_30BH in
the BG-30B 3-36
Installing an FCU_30E in the BG-30E
3-55
Installing an FCU_E2U in the EXT-2U
3-68
426006-2333-013-A05
Index
Installing an MCP30 Module 3-40

Installing an MCP30B Module 3-37
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks 3-8
Installing BG-30 in Racks 2-6
Installing Cable Guides 4-10
Installing Cable Supports 4-34
Installing Cabling Accessories 4-9
Installing Clip Nuts for the BG and DDFs
4-18
Installing Clip Nuts for the BG, DDFs,
and AC CONV Unit 4-21
Installing DDFs 4-22
Installing Equipment 3-1
Installing Equipment Racks B-1
Installing Extendable Rails B-5
Installing Extension Cards in the BG-30E
3-56
Installing Extension Cards in the EXT-2U
3-69
Installing Grounding Cables 4-12
Installing Long Cards in the BG-30E
3-57
Installing Long Cards in the EXT-2U
3-70
Installing Mounting Brackets 4-14
Installing Power Modules in the BG-30E
3-54
Installing SFP Modules 3-46
Installing SFP Modules in the
ESW_2G_8F_E 3-59
Installing SM_10E ICPs 3-29
Installing the 19 4-7
Installing the AC CONV Unit 4-22
Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT 3-30
Installing the BG-30B and a DDF (Option
5) 4-44
Installing the BG-30B and Accessories in
the Wall-Mounted Frame 4-38
4-17
(Option 1) 4-39
I-5
Index

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B in a Wall-Mounted

Cabinet 4-3
Installing the BG-30B Platform 4-19,
4-22
Installing the BG-30B Platform in the
Rack 3-31
Installing the BG-30B, a DDF, and a
RAP-BG (Option 2) 4-40
Installing the BG-30B, a DDF, and an
AC/DC CONV (Option 4) 4-42
Installing the BG-30B, an ICP_MCP30,
and a DDF (Option 3) 4-41
Installing the BG-30B, Two DDFs, and
an AC CONV Unit 4-20
Installing the BG-30E Platform in the
Rack 3-47
Installing the BG-30E Platform on the
BG-30B Platform 3-49
Installing the Cover Holders 4-45
Installing the C-Rail 4-8
Installing the DDFs 4-19
Installing the EXT-2U Platform in the
Rack 3-61
Installing the EXT-2U Shelf on the
BG-30B Shelf 3-61
Installing the Front Door 4-33
Installing the FST 3-22
Installing the H Connector 3-48, 3-62
Installing the ICP_MCP30 3-28
Installing the Interior Components 4-4
Installing the ODF 3-24
Installing the PIM2_63 Cable Guide and
Holder 3-27
Installing the Rack on Concrete Floors
B-2
Installing the Rack on Floating
(Suspended) Floors B-4
Installing the Rack on Suspended
Overhead Trays B-5
Installing the Rack on Wooden Floors
B-3
Installing the Rail Stiffeners 3-31
Installing the RAP-4B 3-15, 3-17
Installing the RAP-BG 3-9, 3-10
I-6
Installing the Rear Panel 4-6

Installing the Side Covers 4-32
Installing the Top and Bottom Covers
4-31
Installing the Wall-Mounted Cabinet
Covers and Door 4-31
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame 4-34
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame Front
Cover 4-45
Installing the xDDF-21 Patch Panel
3-27
Installing Traffic Modules in the SM_10E
3-60
Installing Tslot Modules in the BG-30B
3-44
Installing XIO30 Modules in the BG-30B
3-43
Integrating BG-30 Platforms and Other
Equipment in One Rack 2-8
Integration of Equipment in a Rack 2-8
Intended Audience xiii
Introduction 1-1
L
Laser
classification 2-19
device operation precautions 2-20
information 2-20
safety statutory warning 2-19
warning labels 2-19
Laser Classification 2-19
Laser Device Operating Precautions
2-20
Laser Information 2-20
Laser Safety 2-19
Laser Safety Requirements 2-19
Laser Safety Statutory Warning 2-19
Loss of Signal (LOS) Detection Test 5-6
Loss of Signal Detection Test 5-6
M
Maintenance 6-1
preventive 6-2
Maintenance Action Test 5-10
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Management Cables 2-11

Management Cables 2-11
Marking Rack Floor B-1
MCP30
connection data A-5
installing 3-37
replacing 6-26
Measuring Optical Levels 5-4
Mechanical Checks 5-3
MNG Ethernet
connection data A-3
MNG Ethernet Connector A-3
Modules
replacing 6-24
MPS_2G_8F
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection Data
A-24
N
Network Timing Synchronization Test
5-7
O
Obtaining Technical Documentation xv
ODF
installing 3-24
Onsite Troubleshooting 6-3
Optical
measuring levels 5-4
Optical Connectors
cleaning 2-6
Optical Fibers 2-14
connecting 3-74
Optical Modules
connecting 3-74
Orderwire
connection data A-8
Orderwire Connector A-8
Outline of the Installation Procedure 2-1
Overview xiii, 2-1, 3-1, 4-1, 5-1, 6-1,
A-2
426006-2333-013-A05
Index
P
P345_3E
P345_3E Card Connection Data A-23
Path Protection and Nonretrieval Test
5-9
PE1_63
PE1_63 Card Connection Data A-23
Personnel Training 2-23
Physical Location 2-4
Physical Location of BG-30 2-4
Platform Overview 1-1
Platform Power Cables 2-11
Platform Power-On Test Procedure 5-5
PM345_3
PM345_3 Card Connection Data A-23
PME1_21 A-11
PME1_63
PME1_63 Connection Data A-15
Power
BG-30E 3-54
connecting cables 3-73
installing power modules in BG-30B
3-35
replacing modules 6-29
troubleshooting 6-4
Power Sources 2-5
Power Supply Requirements 2-18
Preliminary Preparations 3-2
Preparing
cables 2-9
fibers 2-9
Preparing Cables and Fibers 2-9
Preparing DC Input Power Cables 3-9,
3-16
Preparing Installation Holes 4-37
Preparing the Rear Panel Holes 4-5
Preventive Maintenance 6-2
I-7
Index

Maintenance Manual
Protection Against Electrostatic

Discharge 2-22
Protection Jumper Cable for TP21_2
(L114) 3-82
Protection Jumper Cable for TPS1_1
(L127) 3-85
Protection Jumper Cables for I/O Cards
3-82
Protection Jumper Cables for TP63_1
(L123 and L128) 3-83
Protection Jumper Cables Usage 3-86
R
Rack
19 B-6
floor marking B-1
grounding B-5
installation B-1
installation on concrete floors B-2
installation on floating floors B-4
installation on wooden floors B-3
installing extendable rails B-5
mounting on suspended overhead tray
B-5
Rack Grounding Requirements 2-17
Rack Installation B-1
Rail Stiffeners
installing 3-31
RAP
input power cables 2-10
installing 3-9
RAP Input Power Cables 2-10
RAP-4B
installation 3-15
RAP-4B Connectors A-55
RAP-BG 3-9
Related Documentation xv
Replacing
Eslot cards 6-28
FCU module 6-30
ICP for MCP30 6-30
ICPs for SM_10E 6-29
MCP30 6-26
I-8
modules 6-24
power modules 6-29
SFP/XFP transceivers 6-31
traffic modules on SM_10E 6-28
Tslot cards 6-27
XIO30 6-27
Replacing an ICP for the MCP30 6-30
Replacing Cards and Modules 6-24
Replacing Eslot Cards 6-28
Replacing ICPs for the SM_10E 6-29
Replacing Power Modules 6-29
Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers 6-31
Replacing the
FCU_30B/FCU_30BH/FCU_30E
Module 6-30
Replacing the MCP30 Card 6-26
Replacing Traffic Modules on the
SM_10E 6-28
Replacing Tslot Cards 6-27
Replacing XIO30 Cards 6-27
Reset Test 5-12
Routing
coaxial cables 3-80
data interface cables to Ethernet
interfaces 3-90
E1 cables for balanced E1 interfaces
3-75
E1 cables for unbalanced E1
interfaces 3-76
electrical cables 3-90
electrical interface cables 3-75
Routing and Connecting Cables and
Fibers in the Cabinet 4-23
Routing and Connecting Cables and
Fibers in the Frame 4-48
3-80, 4-29, 4-52
Routing and Connecting Data Interface
Cables to Ethernet Interfaces 3-90
Balanced E1 Interfaces 3-75
Unbalanced E1 Interfaces 3-76
426006-2333-013-A05

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting E1 Cables to the

PME1_63 3-79
Routing and Connecting Electrical Cables
between the MCP30 and the
ICP_MCP30 3-90
Routing and Connecting Electrical
Interface Cables to the BG-30 3-75
Cables 4-28, 4-51
RS-232
connection data A-7
RS-232 Connector A-7
S
Safety 2-16, 6-24
laser 2-19
Safety and Workmanship 6-24
SDH Commissioning Tests 5-5
SDH Test 5-5
Severity Assignment Test 5-9
Sevirity Assignment Test 5-9
SFP
installing 3-46
installing in ESW_2G_8F_E 3-59
replacing 6-31
SHELF ALARM Connectors A-55
Shelf Power-on Test 5-5
Site Commissinig Tests 5-2
Site Commissioning Tests 5-2
Site Preparation 2-4
SM_10E
installing traffic modules 3-60
replacing ICPs 6-29
replacing traffic modules 6-28
SM_10E Card Connection Data A-31
SM_CODIR_4E
SM_EM_24W6E
SM_FXO_8E
426006-2333-013-A05
Index
SM_FXS_8E
SM_V24E
SM_V35E
Stability Test 5-13
Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly
B-5
System Recovery and Reset Tests 5-12
System Recovery Test 5-12
T
T3/T4
connection data A-4
T3/T4 Timing Connector A-4
Technical Assistance xvi
Temporary EPA 2-23
working within 2-24
Test Equipment 5-1
Test Equipment Setup 5-5
Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials
6-1
Tests
alarm-handling 5-10
commissioning 5-5
data network commisssioning 5-11
equipment 2-6, 5-1, 6-1
equipment power-on 5-5
equipment setup 5-5
frame loss-rate 5-12
input sensitivity 5-7
loss of signal detection 5-6
maintenance actions 5-10
network timing synchronization 5-7
path protection and nonretrieval 5-9
reset 5-12
SDH 5-5
SDH commissioning 5-5
severity assignment 5-9
shelf power-on 5-5
site commissioning 5-2
I-9
Index

Maintenance Manual
stability 5-13
system recovery 5-12
throughput and latency 5-11
traffic stability 5-8
transmission alarm handling 5-10
u_2 Mbps 5-5
u_34 Mbps 5-5
u_45 Mbps 5-5
Throughput and Latency Test 5-11
Throughput and Latency Tests 5-11
Timing (Clock) Cables 2-12
Timing Cable 2-12
connecting 3-91
Tools and Test Equipment 2-6
TP21_2 Connection Data A-25
TP63_1 Connection Data A-30
TPS1_1 Connection Data A-31
Traffic Cable for PME1_63 3-77
Traffic Stability Test 5-8
Transmission Alarm-handling Test 5-10
Transmission Alarm-Handling Test 5-10
Troubleshooting 6-3
power problems 6-4
Troubleshooting Power Problems 6-4
Troubleshooting Using Component
Indicators 6-5
Tslot 3-44
replacing 6-27
Typical BG-30 Installation 2-7
I-10
U
Unpacking and Performing Visual
Inspection 3-5
Unpacking and Visual Inspection 3-5
Use of a Temporary EPA 2-23
V
V.11 Overhead
connection data A-9
V.11 Overhead Connector A-9
Visual Inspection 5-3
Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks
5-3
W
Wall-Mounted Cabinet 4-2
Wall-Mounted Frame 4-34
Warning Labels for Laser Products 2-19
Wiring the E1 Cables to the DDF 4-16
Work and Equipment Safety 2-16
Work Arrangements within a Temporary
EPA 2-24
X
xDDF-21
installing 3-27
XIO30
installing in BG-30B 3-43
replacing 6-27
426006-2333-013-A05

Broadgate Bg-30 Iomm A05 v14 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Broadgate Bg-30 Iomm A05 v14 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BroadGate BG-30

Installation, Operation, and

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual

Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2002-2012. All rights reserved worldwide.

Before You Start ...................................................................... 2-1

Installing Equipment ............................................................... 3-1

BG-30B Wall-Mounted Installations ....................................... 4-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 5-1

Maintenance ............................................................................. 6-1

Connection Data ..................................................................... A-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... A-2

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

Rack Installation ..................................................................... B-1

Installing Equipment Racks .............................................................................. B-1

Index .......................................................................................... I-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

Table 6-7: General troubleshooting procedures for the INF_30B/INF_30BH

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

About This Manual

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

About This Manual

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

Names of windows, dialog

On the Alarms menu...

Menu > Option

Selection from a menu, or

Select Update > View

New terms, emphasized text,

Borders around text

Notes, cautions, and warnings See examples below

NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying

information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or

CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and

About This Manual

TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information

BroadGate Product Line General Description

BroadGate Product Line System Specifications

BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual

BroadGate EMS-BGF User Manual

BroadGate LCT-BGF User Manual

LightSoft Network Management System User Manual

IEC Publication 825 - Laser Safety Requirements